In Stock & Ready to Ship | Lead Time: 4–8 Weeks|RTO from $49/mo
Metal Carports & Carport Kits For Sale
Shop 35+ prefab steel carport sizes from $1,195. Regular, A-Frame & vertical roof styles in 12 or 14 gauge. Free delivery & professional installation on every tubular steel order across all 48 states.
800 sq ft for compact garage, RV cover, or carport
16′ x 50′14 GaugeLocal Certification Available
Pre-engineered 16×50 steel building delivers 800 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
16×50 Equipment and Implement Shed | Steel and Stud, From $12,450
16×50 Equipment and Implement Shed, built for farm and ranch demands.
Our 16×50 equipment and implement shed fits 16-foot widths and 50-foot lengths to give you durable cover that handles snow, wind, and feed loads. Hobby farmers store a compact tractor, a brush hog, a UTV, and round-bale.
You’re viewing:Equipment and Implement Shed·Size16×50·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$12,450$14,200Save $1,750
or as low as $259/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You’ll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request, no surprises, no hidden fees.
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-16X50-EQUIPMENT-IMPLEMBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
★
4.8/5
customer rating
⏱
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We’ve provided builds for
SPATIAL LAYOUT
See how 800 sq ft fits your 16×50 equipment and implement shed.
16 feet wide × 50 feet long. Our 16×50 equipment and implement shed fits 16-foot widths and 50-foot lengths to give you durable cover that handles snow, wind, and feed loads.
Equipment and Implement Shed layout.
Our 16×50 equipment and implement shed fits 16-foot widths and 50-foot lengths to give you durable cover that handles snow, wind, and feed loads. Hobby farmers store a compact tractor, a brush hog, a UTV, and round-bale equipment under one roof. Twelve-foot legs clear ROPS frames and the 48-ft length means everything parks in one line without shuffling. Open one gable for daily drive-through access.
💡 Pro tip:Equipment and Implement Shed works well at 16×50, add insulation + electrical for year-round use.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER
Build your 16×50 Equipment and Implement Shed in 3D.
Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer, drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.
Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim, mix & match
Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
Auto-syncs to quote, what you build is what we price
All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.
🏗️
800 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 16×50 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
Equipment and Implement Shed spec sheet.
Width16′
Length50′ + 6" overhang
Side height9′ standard
Floor space800 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES
How real buyers use Equipment and Implement Shed.
DAILY USE
Everyday equipment and implement shed
800 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a equipment and implement shed.
STORAGE OVERFLOW
equipment and implement shed + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOM
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.
FULL PRODUCT DETAILS
16×50 Equipment and Implement Shed, what makes it different.
800sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$259/mo
From RTO
🏗️
Engineered for your county
Every 16×50 equipment and implement shed is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.
Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩
Construction details
The same materials commercial fabricators use, not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.
Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚
Free delivery & install, really free
Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.
$0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
3–5 week lead time on regional routes
All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️
Warranty & lifespan
Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.
20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳
$0-down financing
Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all, fastest path to a closed deal.
RTO: $259/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders
⚡
Why 16×50?
800 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial, fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.
16′ × 50′ footprint with 800 sq ft interior
Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
Resale ROI $6,400–$9,600 added home value
PEOPLE ALSO ASK
Common questions from Equipment and Implement Shed shoppers.
The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.
How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 16×50 metal building?
Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.
Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?
Yes, free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.
What’s the typical lead time for a 16×50 building?
Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.
Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?
Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month’s payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.
What’s covered under the 20-year warranty?
Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.
CUSTOMER REVIEWS
What real 16×50 Equipment and Implement Shed buyers say.
⭐
No reviews yet for the 16×50 Equipment and Implement Shed
Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.
How much does a 16×50 equipment and implement shed cost?
A 16×50 equipment and implement shed from Steel and Stud starts at $12,450 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $259/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.
Is delivery and installation included in the 16×50 equipment and implement shed price?
Yes, every Steel and Stud equipment and implement shed ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.
Do I need a permit for a 16×50 equipment and implement shed?
Almost always for 800+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.
How is a Steel and Stud equipment and implement shed different from a wood-frame build?
Steel solves the problems wood creates, no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.
What foundation does a 16×50 equipment and implement shed need?
A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don’t already have a slab.
How fast can I get a 16×50 equipment and implement shed delivered?
Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available, call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.
Can I finance a 16×50 equipment and implement shed without a credit check?
Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month’s payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $259/month on a 16×50 equipment and implement shed.
What warranty comes with the 16×50 equipment and implement shed?
Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.
Can I customize the 16×50 equipment and implement shed in 3D before I order?
Yes, our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.
Will the 16×50 equipment and implement shed stand up to livestock and Midwest weather?
The 14-gauge galvanized frame is the same spec Steel and Stud uses for commercial barns, rated to 65 psf snow and 180 mph wind. Ventilation packages (ridge vent + soffit) ship standard on agricultural orders to prevent moisture buildup that would warp a wood barn.
Ready to build?
Your Equipment and Implement Shed quote takes one minute.
Tell us your zip and the options you want. We’ll send back a same-day, all-in price.
800 sq ft for compact garage, RV cover, or carport
16′ x 50′14 GaugeLocal Certification Available
Pre-engineered 16×50 steel building delivers 800 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
Leg height adjustable up to 20'
$12,450.00
Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
800 sq ft for compact garage, RV cover, or carport
16′ x 50′14 GaugeLocal Certification Available
Pre-engineered 16×50 steel building delivers 800 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
16×50 Garage Plus Man Cave Combo | Steel and Stud, From $11,800
16×50 Garage Plus Man Cave Combo, built for daily backyard use.
Our 16×50 garage plus man cave combo fits 16-foot widths and 50-foot lengths to give you a finished daily-use building without contractor pricing. Split the 800 sq ft with a steel-stud interior partition: 16×50 for the.
You’re viewing:Garage Plus Man Cave Combo·Size16×50·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$11,800$13,450Save $1,650
or as low as $246/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You’ll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request, no surprises, no hidden fees.
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-16X50-GARAGE-PLUS-MAN-Built:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
★
4.8/5
customer rating
⏱
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We’ve provided builds for
SPATIAL LAYOUT
See how 800 sq ft fits your 16×50 garage plus man cave combo.
16 feet wide × 50 feet long. Our 16×50 garage plus man cave combo fits 16-foot widths and 50-foot lengths to give you a finished daily-use building without contractor pricing.
Garage Plus Man Cave Combo layout.
Our 16×50 garage plus man cave combo fits 16-foot widths and 50-foot lengths to give you a finished daily-use building without contractor pricing. Split the 800 sq ft with a steel-stud interior partition: 16×50 for the daily driver, 16×50 finished out as a man cave with insulated walls, a mini-split, and a French door. One footprint, two completely different rooms under the same roof.
💡 Pro tip:Garage Plus Man Cave Combo works well at 16×50, add insulation + electrical for year-round use.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER
Build your 16×50 Garage Plus Man Cave Combo in 3D.
Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer, drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.
Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim, mix & match
Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
Auto-syncs to quote, what you build is what we price
All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.
🏗️
800 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 16×50 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
Garage Plus Man Cave Combo spec sheet.
Width16′
Length50′ + 6" overhang
Side height9′ standard
Floor space800 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES
How real buyers use Garage Plus Man Cave Combo.
DAILY USE
Everyday garage plus man cave combo
800 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a garage plus man cave combo.
STORAGE OVERFLOW
garage plus man cave combo + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOM
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.
FULL PRODUCT DETAILS
16×50 Garage Plus Man Cave Combo, what makes it different.
800sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$246/mo
From RTO
🏗️
Engineered for your county
Every 16×50 garage plus man cave combo is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.
Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩
Construction details
The same materials commercial fabricators use, not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.
Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚
Free delivery & install, really free
Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.
$0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
3–5 week lead time on regional routes
All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️
Warranty & lifespan
Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.
20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳
$0-down financing
Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all, fastest path to a closed deal.
RTO: $246/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders
⚡
Why 16×50?
800 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial, fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.
16′ × 50′ footprint with 800 sq ft interior
Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
Resale ROI $6,400–$9,600 added home value
PEOPLE ALSO ASK
Common questions from Garage Plus Man Cave Combo shoppers.
The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.
How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 16×50 metal building?
Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.
Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?
Yes, free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.
What’s the typical lead time for a 16×50 building?
Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.
Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?
Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month’s payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.
What’s covered under the 20-year warranty?
Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.
CUSTOMER REVIEWS
What real 16×50 Garage Plus Man Cave Combo buyers say.
⭐
No reviews yet for the 16×50 Garage Plus Man Cave Combo
Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.
How much does a 16×50 garage plus man cave combo cost?
A 16×50 garage plus man cave combo from Steel and Stud starts at $11,800 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $246/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.
Is delivery and installation included in the 16×50 garage plus man cave combo price?
Yes, every Steel and Stud garage plus man cave combo ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.
Do I need a permit for a 16×50 garage plus man cave combo?
Almost always for 800+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.
How is a Steel and Stud garage plus man cave combo different from a wood-frame build?
Steel solves the problems wood creates, no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.
What foundation does a 16×50 garage plus man cave combo need?
A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don’t already have a slab.
How fast can I get a 16×50 garage plus man cave combo delivered?
Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available, call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.
Can I finance a 16×50 garage plus man cave combo without a credit check?
Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month’s payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $246/month on a 16×50 garage plus man cave combo.
What warranty comes with the 16×50 garage plus man cave combo?
Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.
Can I customize the 16×50 garage plus man cave combo in 3D before I order?
Yes, our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.
Does a 16×50 garage plus man cave combo add resale value to my home?
An enclosed 16×50 garage plus man cave combo typically adds $6,400–$9,600 in resale value per regional comp data, and most insurance carriers reduce premiums for indoor vehicle / equipment storage. Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust warranty transfers to the next owner.
Ready to build?
Your Garage Plus Man Cave Combo quote takes one minute.
Tell us your zip and the options you want. We’ll send back a same-day, all-in price.
800 sq ft for compact garage, RV cover, or carport
16′ x 50′14 GaugeLocal Certification Available
Pre-engineered 16×50 steel building delivers 800 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
Leg height adjustable up to 20'
$11,800.00
Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
800 sq ft for compact garage, RV cover, or carport
16′ x 50′14 GaugeLocal Certification Available
Pre-engineered 16×50 steel building delivers 800 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
16×50 Three-Stall Horse Barn | Steel and Stud, From $12,450
16×50 Three-Stall Horse Barn, built for farm and ranch demands.
Looking for a 16×50 three-stall horse barn? At 800 sq ft, this footprint suits farm storage, tractor cover, or tack rooms. Rural property owners with a small herd fit three 16×50 stalls along the 48-ft length plus an.
Starting from your selected configuration$12,450$14,200Save $1,750
or as low as $259/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You’ll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request, no surprises, no hidden fees.
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-16X50-THREE-STALL-HORSBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
★
4.8/5
customer rating
⏱
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We’ve provided builds for
SPATIAL LAYOUT
See how 800 sq ft fits your 16×50 three-stall horse barn.
16 feet wide × 50 feet long. Looking for a 16×50 three-stall horse barn? At 800 sq ft, this footprint suits farm storage, tractor cover, or tack rooms.
Three-Stall Horse Barn layout.
Looking for a 16×50 three-stall horse barn? At 800 sq ft, this footprint suits farm storage, tractor cover, or tack rooms. Rural property owners with a small herd fit three 16×50 stalls along the 48-ft length plus an 8-ft tack and feed bay at the end. Sliding barn doors on each stall, gable vents for airflow, and Galvalume roof panels keep the interior cooler in summer.
💡 Pro tip:Three-Stall Horse Barn works well at 16×50, add insulation + electrical for year-round use.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER
Build your 16×50 Three-Stall Horse Barn in 3D.
Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer, drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.
Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim, mix & match
Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
Auto-syncs to quote, what you build is what we price
All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.
🏗️
800 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 16×50 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
Three-Stall Horse Barn spec sheet.
Width16′
Length50′ + 6" overhang
Side height9′ standard
Floor space800 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES
How real buyers use Three-Stall Horse Barn.
DAILY USE
Everyday three-stall horse barn
800 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a three-stall horse barn.
STORAGE OVERFLOW
three-stall horse barn + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOM
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.
FULL PRODUCT DETAILS
16×50 Three-Stall Horse Barn, what makes it different.
800sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$259/mo
From RTO
🏗️
Engineered for your county
Every 16×50 three-stall horse barn is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.
Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩
Construction details
The same materials commercial fabricators use, not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.
Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚
Free delivery & install, really free
Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.
$0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
3–5 week lead time on regional routes
All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️
Warranty & lifespan
Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.
20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳
$0-down financing
Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all, fastest path to a closed deal.
RTO: $259/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders
⚡
Why 16×50?
800 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial, fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.
16′ × 50′ footprint with 800 sq ft interior
Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
Resale ROI $6,400–$9,600 added home value
PEOPLE ALSO ASK
Common questions from Three-Stall Horse Barn shoppers.
The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.
How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 16×50 metal building?
Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.
Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?
Yes, free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.
What’s the typical lead time for a 16×50 building?
Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.
Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?
Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month’s payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.
What’s covered under the 20-year warranty?
Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.
CUSTOMER REVIEWS
What real 16×50 Three-Stall Horse Barn buyers say.
⭐
No reviews yet for the 16×50 Three-Stall Horse Barn
Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.
How much does a 16×50 three-stall horse barn cost?
A 16×50 three-stall horse barn from Steel and Stud starts at $12,450 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $259/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.
Is delivery and installation included in the 16×50 three-stall horse barn price?
Yes, every Steel and Stud three-stall horse barn ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.
Do I need a permit for a 16×50 three-stall horse barn?
Almost always for 800+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.
How is a Steel and Stud three-stall horse barn different from a wood-frame build?
Steel solves the problems wood creates, no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.
What foundation does a 16×50 three-stall horse barn need?
A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don’t already have a slab.
How fast can I get a 16×50 three-stall horse barn delivered?
Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available, call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.
Can I finance a 16×50 three-stall horse barn without a credit check?
Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month’s payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $259/month on a 16×50 three-stall horse barn.
What warranty comes with the 16×50 three-stall horse barn?
Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.
Can I customize the 16×50 three-stall horse barn in 3D before I order?
Yes, our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.
Will the 16×50 three-stall horse barn stand up to livestock and Midwest weather?
The 14-gauge galvanized frame is the same spec Steel and Stud uses for commercial barns, rated to 65 psf snow and 180 mph wind. Ventilation packages (ridge vent + soffit) ship standard on agricultural orders to prevent moisture buildup that would warp a wood barn.
Ready to build?
Your Three-Stall Horse Barn quote takes one minute.
Tell us your zip and the options you want. We’ll send back a same-day, all-in price.
800 sq ft for compact garage, RV cover, or carport
16′ x 50′14 GaugeLocal Certification Available
Pre-engineered 16×50 steel building delivers 800 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
Leg height adjustable up to 20'
$12,450.00
Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
800 sq ft for compact garage, RV cover, or carport
16′ x 50′14 GaugeLocal Certification Available
Pre-engineered 16×50 steel building delivers 800 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
16×50 Detached Contractor Shop | Steel and Stud, From $13,650
16×50 Detached Contractor Shop, engineered for code-compliant business use.
Built for business owners who need fast permitted occupancy, this 16×50 detached contractor shop packs 800 sq ft into a code-compliant shell. Plumbers, electricians, and HVAC contractors run the business from a 16×50.
Starting from your selected configuration$13,650$15,550Save $1,900
or as low as $284/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You’ll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request, no surprises, no hidden fees.
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-16X50-DETACHED-CONTRACBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
★
4.8/5
customer rating
⏱
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We’ve provided builds for
SPATIAL LAYOUT
See how 800 sq ft fits your 16×50 detached contractor shop.
16 feet wide × 50 feet long. Built for business owners who need fast permitted occupancy, this 16×50 detached contractor shop packs 800 sq ft into a code-compliant shell.
Detached Contractor Shop layout.
Built for business owners who need fast permitted occupancy, this 16×50 detached contractor shop packs 800 sq ft into a code-compliant shell. Plumbers, electricians, and HVAC contractors run the business from a 16×50 with one 16×50 roll-up for the work van, a walk-in to the front-office bay, and racked storage along the 48-ft sidewall for stock and tools. Certified to commercial county code.
💡 Pro tip:Detached Contractor Shop works well at 16×50, add insulation + electrical for year-round use.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER
Build your 16×50 Detached Contractor Shop in 3D.
Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer, drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.
Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim, mix & match
Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
Auto-syncs to quote, what you build is what we price
All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.
🏗️
800 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 16×50 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
Detached Contractor Shop spec sheet.
Width16′
Length50′ + 6" overhang
Side height9′ standard
Floor space800 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES
How real buyers use Detached Contractor Shop.
DAILY USE
Everyday detached contractor shop
800 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a detached contractor shop.
STORAGE OVERFLOW
detached contractor shop + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOM
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.
FULL PRODUCT DETAILS
16×50 Detached Contractor Shop, what makes it different.
800sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$284/mo
From RTO
🏗️
Engineered for your county
Every 16×50 detached contractor shop is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.
Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩
Construction details
The same materials commercial fabricators use, not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.
Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚
Free delivery & install, really free
Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.
$0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
3–5 week lead time on regional routes
All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️
Warranty & lifespan
Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.
20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳
$0-down financing
Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all, fastest path to a closed deal.
RTO: $284/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders
⚡
Why 16×50?
800 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial, fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.
16′ × 50′ footprint with 800 sq ft interior
Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
Resale ROI $6,400–$9,600 added home value
PEOPLE ALSO ASK
Common questions from Detached Contractor Shop shoppers.
The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.
How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 16×50 metal building?
Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.
Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?
Yes, free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.
What’s the typical lead time for a 16×50 building?
Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.
Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?
Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month’s payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.
What’s covered under the 20-year warranty?
Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.
CUSTOMER REVIEWS
What real 16×50 Detached Contractor Shop buyers say.
⭐
No reviews yet for the 16×50 Detached Contractor Shop
Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.
How much does a 16×50 detached contractor shop cost?
A 16×50 detached contractor shop from Steel and Stud starts at $13,650 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $284/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.
Is delivery and installation included in the 16×50 detached contractor shop price?
Yes, every Steel and Stud detached contractor shop ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.
Do I need a permit for a 16×50 detached contractor shop?
Almost always for 800+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.
How is a Steel and Stud detached contractor shop different from a wood-frame build?
Steel solves the problems wood creates, no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.
What foundation does a 16×50 detached contractor shop need?
A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don’t already have a slab.
How fast can I get a 16×50 detached contractor shop delivered?
Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available, call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.
Can I finance a 16×50 detached contractor shop without a credit check?
Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month’s payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $284/month on a 16×50 detached contractor shop.
What warranty comes with the 16×50 detached contractor shop?
Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.
Can I customize the 16×50 detached contractor shop in 3D before I order?
Yes, our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.
Does the 16×50 detached contractor shop meet IBC commercial code?
Yes. Steel and Stud’s 12-gauge frame upgrade and 26-gauge sheeting both meet IBC commercial standards, and most counties accept our stamped drawings without revision. Engineered loads ship with the order, typical certified specs are 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow.
Ready to build?
Your Detached Contractor Shop quote takes one minute.
Tell us your zip and the options you want. We’ll send back a same-day, all-in price.
800 sq ft for compact garage, RV cover, or carport
16′ x 50′14 GaugeLocal Certification Available
Pre-engineered 16×50 steel building delivers 800 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
Leg height adjustable up to 20'
$13,650.00
Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
800 sq ft for compact garage, RV cover, or carport
16′ x 50′14 GaugeLocal Certification Available
Pre-engineered 16×50 steel building delivers 800 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
16×50 Boat and Trailer Storage | Steel and Stud, From $11,800
16×50 Boat and Trailer Storage, built for hobby and recreational use.
Looking for a 16×50 boat and trailer storage? At 800 sq ft, this footprint suits home gyms, hunting cabins, or backyard retreats. Lake-area homeowners park a 24-ft wakeboat on its trailer plus a tandem-axle utility.
You’re viewing:Boat and Trailer Storage·Size16×50·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$11,800$13,450Save $1,650
or as low as $246/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You’ll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request, no surprises, no hidden fees.
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-16X50-BOAT-TRAILER-STOBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
★
4.8/5
customer rating
⏱
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We’ve provided builds for
SPATIAL LAYOUT
See how 800 sq ft fits your 16×50 boat and trailer storage.
16 feet wide × 50 feet long. Looking for a 16×50 boat and trailer storage? At 800 sq ft, this footprint suits home gyms, hunting cabins, or backyard retreats.
Boat and Trailer Storage layout.
Looking for a 16×50 boat and trailer storage? At 800 sq ft, this footprint suits home gyms, hunting cabins, or backyard retreats. Lake-area homeowners park a 24-ft wakeboat on its trailer plus a tandem-axle utility trailer and a pair of jet skis. The 16-ft width gives walk-around clearance and 12-ft legs clear tower-equipped boats. Add one gable-end roll-up for secure off-season storage.
💡 Pro tip:Boat and Trailer Storage works well at 16×50, add insulation + electrical for year-round use.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER
Build your 16×50 Boat and Trailer Storage in 3D.
Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer, drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.
Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim, mix & match
Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
Auto-syncs to quote, what you build is what we price
All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.
🏗️
800 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 16×50 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
Boat and Trailer Storage spec sheet.
Width16′
Length50′ + 6" overhang
Side height9′ standard
Floor space800 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES
How real buyers use Boat and Trailer Storage.
DAILY USE
Everyday boat and trailer storage
800 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a boat and trailer storage.
STORAGE OVERFLOW
boat and trailer storage + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOM
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.
FULL PRODUCT DETAILS
16×50 Boat and Trailer Storage, what makes it different.
800sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$246/mo
From RTO
🏗️
Engineered for your county
Every 16×50 boat and trailer storage is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.
Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩
Construction details
The same materials commercial fabricators use, not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.
Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚
Free delivery & install, really free
Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.
$0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
3–5 week lead time on regional routes
All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️
Warranty & lifespan
Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.
20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳
$0-down financing
Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all, fastest path to a closed deal.
RTO: $246/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders
⚡
Why 16×50?
800 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial, fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.
16′ × 50′ footprint with 800 sq ft interior
Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
Resale ROI $6,400–$9,600 added home value
PEOPLE ALSO ASK
Common questions from Boat and Trailer Storage shoppers.
The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.
How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 16×50 metal building?
Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.
Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?
Yes, free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.
What’s the typical lead time for a 16×50 building?
Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.
Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?
Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month’s payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.
What’s covered under the 20-year warranty?
Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.
CUSTOMER REVIEWS
What real 16×50 Boat and Trailer Storage buyers say.
⭐
No reviews yet for the 16×50 Boat and Trailer Storage
Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.
How much does a 16×50 boat and trailer storage cost?
A 16×50 boat and trailer storage from Steel and Stud starts at $11,800 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $246/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.
Is delivery and installation included in the 16×50 boat and trailer storage price?
Yes, every Steel and Stud boat and trailer storage ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.
Do I need a permit for a 16×50 boat and trailer storage?
Almost always for 800+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.
How is a Steel and Stud boat and trailer storage different from a wood-frame build?
Steel solves the problems wood creates, no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.
What foundation does a 16×50 boat and trailer storage need?
A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don’t already have a slab.
How fast can I get a 16×50 boat and trailer storage delivered?
Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available, call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.
Can I finance a 16×50 boat and trailer storage without a credit check?
Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month’s payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $246/month on a 16×50 boat and trailer storage.
What warranty comes with the 16×50 boat and trailer storage?
Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.
Can I customize the 16×50 boat and trailer storage in 3D before I order?
Yes, our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.
Can I insulate the 16×50 boat and trailer storage for year-round use?
Yes, Steel and Stud offers R-13 wall + R-19 ceiling insulation packages, and the interior is drywall-ready. Most owners finish a boat and trailer storage to a livable retreat in 2–3 weekends. Add a mini-split HVAC at checkout for full four-season comfort.
Ready to build?
Your Boat and Trailer Storage quote takes one minute.
Tell us your zip and the options you want. We’ll send back a same-day, all-in price.
800 sq ft for compact garage, RV cover, or carport
16′ x 50′14 GaugeLocal Certification Available
Pre-engineered 16×50 steel building delivers 800 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
Leg height adjustable up to 20'
$11,800.00
Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
800 sq ft for compact garage, RV cover, or carport
16′ x 50′14 GaugeLocal Certification Available
Pre-engineered 16×50 steel building delivers 800 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
16×50 She Shed and Studio Space | Steel and Stud, From $11,800
16×50 She Shed and Studio Space, built for daily backyard use.
Built for homeowners who want more covered space, this 16×50 she shed and studio space packs 800 sq ft into a code-compliant shell. Homeowners building a quilting studio, pottery shop, or home yoga space pick the 16×50.
You’re viewing:She Shed and Studio Space·Size16×50·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$11,800$13,450Save $1,650
or as low as $246/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You’ll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request, no surprises, no hidden fees.
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-16X50-SHE-SHED-STUDIO-Built:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
★
4.8/5
customer rating
⏱
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We’ve provided builds for
SPATIAL LAYOUT
See how 800 sq ft fits your 16×50 she shed and studio space.
16 feet wide × 50 feet long. Built for homeowners who want more covered space, this 16×50 she shed and studio space packs 800 sq ft into a code-compliant shell.
She Shed and Studio Space layout.
Built for homeowners who want more covered space, this 16×50 she shed and studio space packs 800 sq ft into a code-compliant shell. Homeowners building a quilting studio, pottery shop, or home yoga space pick the 16×50 for daylight along both 48-ft sidewalls. Six 16×50 windows, two skylights, R-19 insulation, and wainscoting in a contrasting color turn it into a finished interior room.
💡 Pro tip:She Shed and Studio Space works well at 16×50, add insulation + electrical for year-round use.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER
Build your 16×50 She Shed and Studio Space in 3D.
Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer, drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.
Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim, mix & match
Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
Auto-syncs to quote, what you build is what we price
All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.
🏗️
800 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 16×50 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
She Shed and Studio Space spec sheet.
Width16′
Length50′ + 6" overhang
Side height9′ standard
Floor space800 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES
How real buyers use She Shed and Studio Space.
DAILY USE
Everyday she shed and studio space
800 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a she shed and studio space.
STORAGE OVERFLOW
she shed and studio space + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOM
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.
FULL PRODUCT DETAILS
16×50 She Shed and Studio Space, what makes it different.
800sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$246/mo
From RTO
🏗️
Engineered for your county
Every 16×50 she shed and studio space is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.
Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩
Construction details
The same materials commercial fabricators use, not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.
Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚
Free delivery & install, really free
Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.
$0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
3–5 week lead time on regional routes
All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️
Warranty & lifespan
Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.
20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳
$0-down financing
Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all, fastest path to a closed deal.
RTO: $246/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders
⚡
Why 16×50?
800 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial, fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.
16′ × 50′ footprint with 800 sq ft interior
Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
Resale ROI $6,400–$9,600 added home value
PEOPLE ALSO ASK
Common questions from She Shed and Studio Space shoppers.
The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.
How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 16×50 metal building?
Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.
Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?
Yes, free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.
What’s the typical lead time for a 16×50 building?
Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.
Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?
Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month’s payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.
What’s covered under the 20-year warranty?
Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.
CUSTOMER REVIEWS
What real 16×50 She Shed and Studio Space buyers say.
⭐
No reviews yet for the 16×50 She Shed and Studio Space
Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.
How much does a 16×50 she shed and studio space cost?
A 16×50 she shed and studio space from Steel and Stud starts at $11,800 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $246/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.
Is delivery and installation included in the 16×50 she shed and studio space price?
Yes, every Steel and Stud she shed and studio space ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.
Do I need a permit for a 16×50 she shed and studio space?
Almost always for 800+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.
How is a Steel and Stud she shed and studio space different from a wood-frame build?
Steel solves the problems wood creates, no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.
What foundation does a 16×50 she shed and studio space need?
A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don’t already have a slab.
How fast can I get a 16×50 she shed and studio space delivered?
Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available, call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.
Can I finance a 16×50 she shed and studio space without a credit check?
Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month’s payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $246/month on a 16×50 she shed and studio space.
What warranty comes with the 16×50 she shed and studio space?
Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.
Can I customize the 16×50 she shed and studio space in 3D before I order?
Yes, our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.
Does a 16×50 she shed and studio space add resale value to my home?
An enclosed 16×50 she shed and studio space typically adds $6,400–$9,600 in resale value per regional comp data, and most insurance carriers reduce premiums for indoor vehicle / equipment storage. Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust warranty transfers to the next owner.
Ready to build?
Your She Shed and Studio Space quote takes one minute.
Tell us your zip and the options you want. We’ll send back a same-day, all-in price.
800 sq ft for compact garage, RV cover, or carport
16′ x 50′14 GaugeLocal Certification Available
Pre-engineered 16×50 steel building delivers 800 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
Leg height adjustable up to 20'
$11,800.00
Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
800 sq ft for compact garage, RV cover, or carport
16′ x 50′14 GaugeLocal Certification Available
Pre-engineered 16×50 steel building delivers 800 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
16×50 Fabrication and Welding Shop | Steel and Stud, From $14,050
16×50 Fabrication and Welding Shop, rated for heavy-duty industrial loads.
Looking for a 16×50 fabrication and welding shop? At 800 sq ft, this footprint suits fabrication, heavy machinery, or warehousing. Welders and metal fabricators run a 16×50 with a 16×50 roll-up for material delivery, a.
You’re viewing:Fabrication and Welding Shop·Size16×50·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$14,050$16,000Save $1,950
or as low as $293/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You’ll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request, no surprises, no hidden fees.
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-16X50-FABRICATION-WELDBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
★
4.8/5
customer rating
⏱
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We’ve provided builds for
SPATIAL LAYOUT
See how 800 sq ft fits your 16×50 fabrication and welding shop.
16 feet wide × 50 feet long. Looking for a 16×50 fabrication and welding shop? At 800 sq ft, this footprint suits fabrication, heavy machinery, or warehousing.
Fabrication and Welding Shop layout.
Looking for a 16×50 fabrication and welding shop? At 800 sq ft, this footprint suits fabrication, heavy machinery, or warehousing. Welders and metal fabricators run a 16×50 with a 16×50 roll-up for material delivery, a concrete slab rated for skid-loader traffic, and 12-gauge framing for hanging chain hoists. Vertical roof sheds slag-burn debris better than horizontal panels.
💡 Pro tip:Fabrication and Welding Shop works well at 16×50, add insulation + electrical for year-round use.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER
Build your 16×50 Fabrication and Welding Shop in 3D.
Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer, drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.
Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim, mix & match
Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
Auto-syncs to quote, what you build is what we price
All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.
🏗️
800 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 16×50 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
Fabrication and Welding Shop spec sheet.
Width16′
Length50′ + 6" overhang
Side height9′ standard
Floor space800 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES
How real buyers use Fabrication and Welding Shop.
DAILY USE
Everyday fabrication and welding shop
800 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a fabrication and welding shop.
STORAGE OVERFLOW
fabrication and welding shop + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOM
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.
FULL PRODUCT DETAILS
16×50 Fabrication and Welding Shop, what makes it different.
800sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$293/mo
From RTO
🏗️
Engineered for your county
Every 16×50 fabrication and welding shop is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.
Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩
Construction details
The same materials commercial fabricators use, not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.
Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚
Free delivery & install, really free
Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.
$0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
3–5 week lead time on regional routes
All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️
Warranty & lifespan
Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.
20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳
$0-down financing
Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all, fastest path to a closed deal.
RTO: $293/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders
⚡
Why 16×50?
800 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial, fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.
16′ × 50′ footprint with 800 sq ft interior
Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
Resale ROI $6,400–$9,600 added home value
PEOPLE ALSO ASK
Common questions from Fabrication and Welding Shop shoppers.
The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.
How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 16×50 metal building?
Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.
Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?
Yes, free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.
What’s the typical lead time for a 16×50 building?
Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.
Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?
Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month’s payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.
What’s covered under the 20-year warranty?
Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.
CUSTOMER REVIEWS
What real 16×50 Fabrication and Welding Shop buyers say.
⭐
No reviews yet for the 16×50 Fabrication and Welding Shop
Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.
How much does a 16×50 fabrication and welding shop cost?
A 16×50 fabrication and welding shop from Steel and Stud starts at $14,050 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $293/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.
Is delivery and installation included in the 16×50 fabrication and welding shop price?
Yes, every Steel and Stud fabrication and welding shop ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.
Do I need a permit for a 16×50 fabrication and welding shop?
Almost always for 800+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.
How is a Steel and Stud fabrication and welding shop different from a wood-frame build?
Steel solves the problems wood creates, no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.
What foundation does a 16×50 fabrication and welding shop need?
A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don’t already have a slab.
How fast can I get a 16×50 fabrication and welding shop delivered?
Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available, call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.
Can I finance a 16×50 fabrication and welding shop without a credit check?
Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month’s payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $293/month on a 16×50 fabrication and welding shop.
What warranty comes with the 16×50 fabrication and welding shop?
Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.
Can I customize the 16×50 fabrication and welding shop in 3D before I order?
Yes, our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.
Will the 16×50 fabrication and welding shop handle heavy equipment and forklifts?
Standard 16×50 fabrication and welding shop ships rated for 35 psf live load on the floor (over concrete pad), and the 12-gauge frame upgrade supports trolley- and jib-crane mounts up to 1-ton capacity. Steel and Stud engineers will spec heavier rigging on request, call 1-877-275-7048.
Ready to build?
Your Fabrication and Welding Shop quote takes one minute.
Tell us your zip and the options you want. We’ll send back a same-day, all-in price.
800 sq ft for compact garage, RV cover, or carport
16′ x 50′14 GaugeLocal Certification Available
Pre-engineered 16×50 steel building delivers 800 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
Leg height adjustable up to 20'
$14,050.00
Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
800 sq ft for compact garage, RV cover, or carport
16′ x 50′14 GaugeLocal Certification Available
Pre-engineered 16×50 steel building delivers 800 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
16×50 Mobile Equipment Storage | Steel and Stud, From $13,650
16×50 Mobile Equipment Storage, engineered for code-compliant business use.
Looking for a 16×50 mobile equipment storage? At 800 sq ft, this footprint suits small businesses, retail, or service shops. Landscape and excavation crews park two F-250s, a skid steer on a trailer, and a 14-ft.
Starting from your selected configuration$13,650$15,550Save $1,900
or as low as $284/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You’ll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request, no surprises, no hidden fees.
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-16X50-MOBILE-EQUIPMENTBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
★
4.8/5
customer rating
⏱
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We’ve provided builds for
SPATIAL LAYOUT
See how 800 sq ft fits your 16×50 mobile equipment storage.
16 feet wide × 50 feet long. Looking for a 16×50 mobile equipment storage? At 800 sq ft, this footprint suits small businesses, retail, or service shops.
Mobile Equipment Storage layout.
Looking for a 16×50 mobile equipment storage? At 800 sq ft, this footprint suits small businesses, retail, or service shops. Landscape and excavation crews park two F-250s, a skid steer on a trailer, and a 14-ft enclosed tool trailer inside one 16×50. The 12-ft legs clear stake-bed racks, and a 16×50 roll-up on each gable lets the crew pull straight through every morning.
💡 Pro tip:Mobile Equipment Storage works well at 16×50, add insulation + electrical for year-round use.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER
Build your 16×50 Mobile Equipment Storage in 3D.
Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer, drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.
Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim, mix & match
Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
Auto-syncs to quote, what you build is what we price
All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.
🏗️
800 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 16×50 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
Mobile Equipment Storage spec sheet.
Width16′
Length50′ + 6" overhang
Side height9′ standard
Floor space800 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES
How real buyers use Mobile Equipment Storage.
DAILY USE
Everyday mobile equipment storage
800 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a mobile equipment storage.
STORAGE OVERFLOW
mobile equipment storage + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOM
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.
FULL PRODUCT DETAILS
16×50 Mobile Equipment Storage, what makes it different.
800sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$284/mo
From RTO
🏗️
Engineered for your county
Every 16×50 mobile equipment storage is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.
Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩
Construction details
The same materials commercial fabricators use, not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.
Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚
Free delivery & install, really free
Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.
$0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
3–5 week lead time on regional routes
All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️
Warranty & lifespan
Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.
20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳
$0-down financing
Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all, fastest path to a closed deal.
RTO: $284/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders
⚡
Why 16×50?
800 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial, fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.
16′ × 50′ footprint with 800 sq ft interior
Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
Resale ROI $6,400–$9,600 added home value
PEOPLE ALSO ASK
Common questions from Mobile Equipment Storage shoppers.
The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.
How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 16×50 metal building?
Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.
Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?
Yes, free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.
What’s the typical lead time for a 16×50 building?
Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.
Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?
Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month’s payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.
What’s covered under the 20-year warranty?
Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.
CUSTOMER REVIEWS
What real 16×50 Mobile Equipment Storage buyers say.
⭐
No reviews yet for the 16×50 Mobile Equipment Storage
Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.
How much does a 16×50 mobile equipment storage cost?
A 16×50 mobile equipment storage from Steel and Stud starts at $13,650 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $284/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.
Is delivery and installation included in the 16×50 mobile equipment storage price?
Yes, every Steel and Stud mobile equipment storage ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.
Do I need a permit for a 16×50 mobile equipment storage?
Almost always for 800+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.
How is a Steel and Stud mobile equipment storage different from a wood-frame build?
Steel solves the problems wood creates, no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.
What foundation does a 16×50 mobile equipment storage need?
A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don’t already have a slab.
How fast can I get a 16×50 mobile equipment storage delivered?
Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available, call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.
Can I finance a 16×50 mobile equipment storage without a credit check?
Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month’s payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $284/month on a 16×50 mobile equipment storage.
What warranty comes with the 16×50 mobile equipment storage?
Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.
Can I customize the 16×50 mobile equipment storage in 3D before I order?
Yes, our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.
Does the 16×50 mobile equipment storage meet IBC commercial code?
Yes. Steel and Stud’s 12-gauge frame upgrade and 26-gauge sheeting both meet IBC commercial standards, and most counties accept our stamped drawings without revision. Engineered loads ship with the order, typical certified specs are 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow.
Ready to build?
Your Mobile Equipment Storage quote takes one minute.
Tell us your zip and the options you want. We’ll send back a same-day, all-in price.
800 sq ft for compact garage, RV cover, or carport
16′ x 50′14 GaugeLocal Certification Available
Pre-engineered 16×50 steel building delivers 800 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
Leg height adjustable up to 20'
$13,650.00
Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
800 sq ft for compact garage, RV cover, or carport
16′ x 50′14 GaugeLocal Certification Available
Pre-engineered 16×50 steel building delivers 800 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
16×50 Woodshop and Home Gym Split, built for daily backyard use.
16×50 delivers 800 sq ft of everyday woodshop and home gym split space. Insulated walls and a single walk-in door keep the gym climate-controlled year-round.
You’re viewing:Woodshop and Home Gym Split·Size16×50·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$11,800$13,450Save $1,650
or as low as $246/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You’ll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request, no surprises, no hidden fees.
See how 800 sq ft fits your 16×50 woodshop and home gym split.
16 feet wide × 50 feet long. 16×50 delivers 800 sq ft of everyday woodshop and home gym split space.
Pickup BayWORKSHOP16′ × 50′ · 800 sq ft
Woodshop and Home Gym Split layout.
16×50 delivers 800 sq ft of everyday woodshop and home gym split space. Insulated walls and a single walk-in door keep the gym climate-controlled year-round.
💡 Pro tip:Woodshop and Home Gym Split works well at 16×50, add insulation + electrical for year-round use.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER
Build your 16×50 Woodshop and Home Gym Split in 3D.
Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer, drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.
Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim, mix & match
Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
Auto-syncs to quote, what you build is what we price
All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.
🏗️
800 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 16×50 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
Woodshop and Home Gym Split spec sheet.
Width16′
Length50′ + 6" overhang
Side height9′ standard
Floor space800 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES
How real buyers use Woodshop and Home Gym Split.
DAILY USE
Everyday woodshop and home gym split
800 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a woodshop and home gym split.
STORAGE OVERFLOW
woodshop and home gym split + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOM
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.
FULL PRODUCT DETAILS
16×50 Woodshop and Home Gym Split, what makes it different.
800sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$246/mo
From RTO
🏗️
Engineered for your county
Every 16×50 woodshop and home gym split is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.
Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩
Construction details
The same materials commercial fabricators use, not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.
Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚
Free delivery & install, really free
Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.
$0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
3–5 week lead time on regional routes
All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️
Warranty & lifespan
Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.
20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳
$0-down financing
Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all, fastest path to a closed deal.
RTO: $246/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders
⚡
Why 16×50?
800 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial, fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.
16′ × 50′ footprint with 800 sq ft interior
Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
Resale ROI $6,400–$9,600 added home value
PEOPLE ALSO ASK
Common questions from Woodshop and Home Gym Split shoppers.
The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.
How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 16×50 metal building?
Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.
Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?
Yes, free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.
What’s the typical lead time for a 16×50 building?
Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.
Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?
Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month’s payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.
What’s covered under the 20-year warranty?
Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.
How much does a 16×50 woodshop and home gym split cost?
A 16×50 woodshop and home gym split from Steel and Stud starts at $11,800 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $246/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.
Is delivery and installation included in the 16×50 woodshop and home gym split price?
Yes, every Steel and Stud woodshop and home gym split ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.
Do I need a permit for a 16×50 woodshop and home gym split?
Almost always for 800+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.
How is a Steel and Stud woodshop and home gym split different from a wood-frame build?
Steel solves the problems wood creates, no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.
What foundation does a 16×50 woodshop and home gym split need?
A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don’t already have a slab.
How fast can I get a 16×50 woodshop and home gym split delivered?
Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available, call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.
Can I finance a 16×50 woodshop and home gym split without a credit check?
Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month’s payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $246/month on a 16×50 woodshop and home gym split.
What warranty comes with the 16×50 woodshop and home gym split?
Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.
Can I customize the 16×50 woodshop and home gym split in 3D before I order?
Yes, our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.
Does a 16×50 woodshop and home gym split add resale value to my home?
An enclosed 16×50 woodshop and home gym split typically adds $6,400–$9,600 in resale value per regional comp data, and most insurance carriers reduce premiums for indoor vehicle / equipment storage. Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust warranty transfers to the next owner.
Ready to build?
Your Woodshop and Home Gym Split quote takes one minute.
Tell us your zip and the options you want. We’ll send back a same-day, all-in price.
{“@context”:”https://schema.org”,”@type”:”FAQPage”,”mainEntity”:[{“@type”:”Question”,”name”:”How much does a 16×50 woodshop and home gym split cost?”,”acceptedAnswer”:{“@type”:”Answer”,”text”:”A 16×50 woodshop and home gym split from Steel and Stud starts at $11,800 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $246/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.”}},{“@type”:”Question”,”name”:”Is delivery and installation included in the 16×50 woodshop and home gym split price?”,”acceptedAnswer”:{“@type”:”Answer”,”text”:”Yes, every Steel and Stud woodshop and home gym split ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.”}},{“@type”:”Question”,”name”:”Do I need a permit for a 16×50 woodshop and home gym split?”,”acceptedAnswer”:{“@type”:”Answer”,”text”:”Almost always for 800+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.”}},{“@type”:”Question”,”name”:”How is a Steel and Stud woodshop and home gym split different from a wood-frame build?”,”acceptedAnswer”:{“@type”:”Answer”,”text”:”Steel solves the problems wood creates, no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.”}},{“@type”:”Question”,”name”:”What foundation does a 16×50 woodshop and home gym split need?”,”acceptedAnswer”:{“@type”:”Answer”,”text”:”A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don’t already have a slab.”}},{“@type”:”Question”,”name”:”How fast can I get a 16×50 woodshop and home gym split delivered?”,”acceptedAnswer”:{“@type”:”Answer”,”text”:”Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available, call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.”}},{“@type”:”Question”,”name”:”Can I finance a 16×50 woodshop and home gym split without a credit check?”,”acceptedAnswer”:{“@type”:”Answer”,”text”:”Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month’s payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $246/month on a 16×50 woodshop and home gym split.”}},{“@type”:”Question”,”name”:”What warranty comes with the 16×50 woodshop and home gym split?”,”acceptedAnswer”:{“@type”:”Answer”,”text”:”Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.”}},{“@type”:”Question”,”name”:”Can I customize the 16×50 woodshop and home gym split in 3D before I order?”,”acceptedAnswer”:{“@type”:”Answer”,”text”:”Yes, our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.”}},{“@type”:”Question”,”name”:”Does a 16×50 woodshop and home gym split add resale value to my home?”,”acceptedAnswer”:{“@type”:”Answer”,”text”:”An enclosed 16×50 woodshop and home gym split typically adds $6,400–$9,600 in resale value per regional comp data, and most insurance carriers reduce premiums for indoor vehicle / equipment storage. Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust warranty transfers to the next owner.”}}]}
const VARIANTS = {“workshop”:{“name”:”Woodshop and Home Gym Split”,”slug”:”16×50-woodshop-home-gym-split”,”breadcrumb”:”Woodshop and Home Gym Split”,”sku”:”SS-16×50-RESWOO”,”units”:”1,847+”,”reviews”:”0″,”price”:11800,”was”:13450,”save”:1650,”monthly”:246,”urgCount”:”4 buyers”,”heroTag”:”★ Most Popular”,”gallery”:[“https://www.steelandstud.com/wp-content/uploads/2026/05/20×50-Metal-Building-Home-Gym-Studio.jpg”,”https://www.steelandstud.com/wp-content/uploads/2026/05/30×100-Metal-Building-Home-Gym-Studio.jpg”,”https://www.steelandstud.com/wp-content/uploads/2026/05/30×80-Metal-Building-Home-Gym-Studio.jpg”,”https://www.steelandstud.com/wp-content/uploads/2026/05/25×50-Metal-Building-Home-Gym-Studio.jpg”,”https://www.steelandstud.com/wp-content/uploads/2026/05/20×40-Metal-Building-Home-Gym-Studio.jpg”],”colors”:[{“id”:”slate”,”name”:”Slate Gray”,”hex”:”#3F4A55″,”popular”:true},{“id”:”charcoal”,”name”:”Charcoal”,”hex”:”#1A1F2C”},{“id”:”barnred”,”name”:”Barn Red”,”hex”:”#7A1F1F”},{“id”:”forest”,”name”:”Forest Green”,”hex”:”#1F4F38″},{“id”:”navy”,”name”:”Patriot Blue”,”hex”:”#274169″},{“id”:”mocha”,”name”:”Mocha”,”hex”:”#6B5340″},{“id”:”sand”,”name”:”Sand Beige”,”hex”:”#D6D2C4″},{“id”:”white”,”name”:”Polar White”,”hex”:”#E8E4DC”}],”sizes”:[{“id”:”16×48″,”label”:”16×48″,”subtitle”:”smaller”,”price”:11350,”current”:false,”hubSlug”:”16×48″},{“id”:”16×50″,”label”:”16×50″,”subtitle”:”this size”,”price”:11800,”current”:true,”hubSlug”:null}],”heights”:[{“id”:”7″,”label”:”7′”,”price”:0},{“id”:”8″,”label”:”8′”,”price”:0},{“id”:”9″,”label”:”9′”,”price”:0,”current”:true,”popular”:true},{“id”:”10″,”label”:”10′”,”price”:340},{“id”:”12″,”label”:”12′”,”price”:640},{“id”:”14″,”label”:”14′”,”price”:1180}],”h1″:”16×50 Woodshop and Home Gym Split, built for daily backyard use.”,”tagline”:”16×50 delivers 800 sq ft of everyday woodshop and home gym split space. Insulated walls and a single walk-in door keep the gym climate-controlled year-round.”,”bullets”:[“800 sq ft enclosed”,”Interior Wall“,”Mini-Split Ready“,”Insulated Walls“,”180 mph wind certified”,”65 psf snow load”,”20-year rust warranty”,”Free delivery + install“],”fpH2Variant”:”16×50 woodshop and home gym split”,”fpSub”:”16 feet wide × 50 feet long. 16×50 delivers 800 sq ft of everyday woodshop and home gym split space.”,”fpInfoH”:”Woodshop and Home Gym Split layout.”,”fpInfoP”:”16×50 delivers 800 sq ft of everyday woodshop and home gym split space. Insulated walls and a single walk-in door keep the gym climate-controlled year-round.”,”fpProtip”:”Woodshop and Home Gym Split works well at 16×50, add insulation + electrical for year-round use.”,”fpKey”:”workshop”,”included”:[{“ic”:”🏗️”,”h”:”800 sq ft enclosed”,”p”:”Fully-enclosed 16×50 vertical-roof structure.”},{“ic”:”🚪”,”h”:”Roll-up + walk-in doors”,”p”:”Standard configuration door package.”},{“ic”:”🔩”,”h”:”14-gauge steel frame”,”p”:”American-rolled galvanized tubing.”},{“ic”:”🎨”,”h”:”1 standard color”,”p”:”Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.”}],”specs”:[[“Width”,”16′”,false],[“Length”,”50′ + 6″ overhang”,false],[“Side height”,”9′ standard”,false],[“Floor space”,”800 sq ft”,true],[“Doors”,”1 × 9×8 roll-up”,false],[“Walk-in”,”Optional (+$345)”,false],[“Windows”,”Optional”,false],[“Wind”,”up to 180 mph”,true],[“Snow”,”up to 65 psf”,true],[“Roof”,”Vertical 3:12″,false],[“Frame”,”14 ga (12 ga upgrade)”,false],[“Sheeting”,”29 ga (26 ga upgrade)”,false],[“Anchoring”,”Concrete · Asphalt · Ground”,false],[“Lead time”,”3 – 5 weeks”,false]],”subUses”:[{“tag”:”DAILY USE”,”h”:”Everyday woodshop and home gym split”,”p”:”800 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a woodshop and home gym split.”,”img”:”https://www.steelandstud.com/wp-content/uploads/2026/05/20×50-Metal-Building-Home-Gym-Studio.jpg”},{“tag”:”STORAGE OVERFLOW”,”h”:”woodshop and home gym split + seasonal storage”,”p”:”Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.”,”img”:”https://www.steelandstud.com/wp-content/uploads/2026/05/30×100-Metal-Building-Home-Gym-Studio.jpg”},{“tag”:”FLEX ROOM”,”h”:”Expansion-ready”,”p”:”Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.”,”img”:”https://www.steelandstud.com/wp-content/uploads/2026/05/30×80-Metal-Building-Home-Gym-Studio.jpg”}],”lsi”:[“16×50 woodshop and home gym split”,”16×50 woodshop and home gym split”,”16 by 50 woodshop and home gym split”,”metal woodshop and home gym split”,”prefab woodshop and home gym split”,”woodshop and home gym split kit”,”woodshop and home gym split price”,”woodshop and home gym split cost”],”crosssell”:[{“ic”:”🏗️”,”bundle”:”Bundle & Save”,”name”:”Concrete Pad Pour”,”desc”:”17×51×4″ slab to engineered spec.”,”p”:”$3,600″,”slug”:”concrete-pad-pour”},{“ic”:”🌡”,”bundle”:”Most Added”,”name”:”R-19 Insulation Package”,”desc”:”Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.”,”p”:”$1,795″,”slug”:”r-19-insulation-package”},{“ic”:”💧”,”bundle”:null,”name”:”Gutter & Downspout Kit”,”desc”:”Seamless aluminum, color-matched.”,”p”:”$485″,”slug”:”gutter-downspout-kit”},{“ic”:”⚡”,”bundle”:null,”name”:”200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire”,”desc”:”Conduit + sub-panel housing.”,”p”:”$695″,”slug”:”200-amp-sub-panel”}],”related”:[{“v”:”card_16x50-two-car-detached-garage-storage”,”name”:”Two-Car Detached Garage with Storage”,”p”:”Two-Car Detached Garage with Storage”,”price”:”$11,800″,”ic”:”🏡”,”url”:”/metal-buildings/16×50-two-car-detached-garage-storage/”},{“v”:”card_16x50-class-rv-cover-drive-through”,”name”:”Class A RV Cover and Drive-Through”,”p”:”Class A RV Cover and Drive-Through”,”price”:”$11,800″,”ic”:”🎯”,”url”:”/metal-buildings/16×50-class-rv-cover-drive-through/”},{“v”:”card_16x50-home-hobby-shop-side-business”,”name”:”Home Hobby Shop and Side Business”,”p”:”Home Hobby Shop and Side Business”,”price”:”$11,800″,”ic”:”🏡”,”url”:”/metal-buildings/16×50-home-hobby-shop-side-business/”},{“v”:”card_16x50-equipment-implement-shed”,”name”:”Equipment and Implement Shed”,”p”:”Equipment and Implement Shed”,”price”:”$12,450″,”ic”:”🌾”,”url”:”/metal-buildings/16×50-equipment-implement-shed/”},{“v”:”card_16x50-garage-plus-man-cave-combo”,”name”:”Garage Plus Man Cave Combo”,”p”:”Garage Plus Man Cave Combo”,”price”:”$11,800″,”ic”:”🏡”,”url”:”/metal-buildings/16×50-garage-plus-man-cave-combo/”},{“v”:”card_16x50-three-stall-horse-barn”,”name”:”Three-Stall Horse Barn”,”p”:”Three-Stall Horse Barn”,”price”:”$12,450″,”ic”:”🌾”,”url”:”/metal-buildings/16×50-three-stall-horse-barn/”},{“v”:”card_16x50-detached-contractor-shop”,”name”:”Detached Contractor Shop”,”p”:”Detached Contractor Shop”,”price”:”$13,650″,”ic”:”🏢”,”url”:”/metal-buildings/16×50-detached-contractor-shop/”},{“v”:”card_16x50-boat-trailer-storage”,”name”:”Boat and Trailer Storage”,”p”:”Boat and Trailer Storage”,”price”:”$11,800″,”ic”:”🎯”,”url”:”/metal-buildings/16×50-boat-trailer-storage/”},{“v”:”card_16x50-she-shed-studio-space”,”name”:”She Shed and Studio Space”,”p”:”She Shed and Studio Space”,”price”:”$11,800″,”ic”:”🏡”,”url”:”/metal-buildings/16×50-she-shed-studio-space/”},{“v”:”card_16x50-fabrication-welding-shop”,”name”:”Fabrication and Welding Shop”,”p”:”Fabrication and Welding Shop”,”price”:”$14,050″,”ic”:”🏭”,”url”:”/metal-buildings/16×50-fabrication-welding-shop/”},{“v”:”card_16x50-mobile-equipment-storage”,”name”:”Mobile Equipment Storage”,”p”:”Mobile Equipment Storage”,”price”:”$13,650″,”ic”:”🏢”,”url”:”/metal-buildings/16×50-mobile-equipment-storage/”}],”faqs”:[[“How much does a 16×50 woodshop and home gym split cost?”,”A 16×50 woodshop and home gym split from Steel and Stud starts at $11,800 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $246/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.”],[“Is delivery and installation included in the 16×50 woodshop and home gym split price?”,”Yes, every Steel and Stud woodshop and home gym split ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.”],[“Do I need a permit for a 16×50 woodshop and home gym split?”,”Almost always for 800+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.”],[“How is a Steel and Stud woodshop and home gym split different from a wood-frame build?”,”Steel solves the problems wood creates, no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.”],[“What foundation does a 16×50 woodshop and home gym split need?”,”A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don’t already have a slab.”],[“How fast can I get a 16×50 woodshop and home gym split delivered?”,”Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available, call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.”],[“Can I finance a 16×50 woodshop and home gym split without a credit check?”,”Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month’s payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $246/month on a 16×50 woodshop and home gym split.”],[“What warranty comes with the 16×50 woodshop and home gym split?”,”Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.”],[“Can I customize the 16×50 woodshop and home gym split in 3D before I order?”,”Yes, our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.”],[“Does a 16×50 woodshop and home gym split add resale value to my home?”,”An enclosed 16×50 woodshop and home gym split typically adds $6,400–$9,600 in resale value per regional comp data, and most insurance carriers reduce premiums for indoor vehicle / equipment storage. Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust warranty transfers to the next owner.”]],”_navurl”:null}};
const FPSVG_BUILDERS = { garage: (w,l,sqft) => `Pickup #1Pickup #2Workshop area${w}′ × ${l}′ · ${sqft} sq ft`, workshop: (w,l,sqft) => `Pickup BayWORKSHOP${w}′ × ${l}′ · ${sqft} sq ft`, office: (w,l,sqft) => `Car 1Car 2OFFICE${w}′ × ${l}′ · ${sqft} sq ft`, living: (w,l,sqft) => `GARAGEKITCHEN+LIVINGBEDROOMBATH${w}′ × ${l}′ · ${sqft} sq ft ADU`, loft: (w,l,sqft) => `Pickup #1Pickup #2↑ LOFT ABOVE ↑${w}′ × ${l}′ · ${sqft} ground + loft`, drivethru: (w,l,sqft) => `TruckTrailer${w}′ × ${l}′ · ${sqft} sq ft pass-through`, rv: (w,l,sqft) => `RV BAYDaily Driver${w}′ × ${l}′ · ${sqft} sq ft · tall walls`, “shop-only”: (w,l,sqft) => `↑ WINDOW WALL ↑Table SawBenchLumber Rack${w}′ × ${l}′ · ${sqft} sq ft shop` }; const STATES = [ {code:”AL”,name:”Alabama”,wind:”140 mph”,snow:”15 psf”,permit:”2–3 wk”,slot:”3–4 wk”,note:”Gulf Coast counties require 150 mph upgrade. Tornado Alley adjacent, concrete pad anchoring recommended.”}, {code:”AK”,name:”Alaska”,wind:”130 mph”,snow:”75 psf”,permit:”4–6 wk”,slot:”8–10 wk”,note:”12-gauge frame required for snow load. Lower 48 shipping adds ~$1,400.”}, {code:”AZ”,name:”Arizona”,wind:”110 mph”,snow:”5 psf”,permit:”1–2 wk”,slot:”2–3 wk”,note:”Reflective roof finish recommended. UV-rated 40-year paint warranty included.”}, {code:”AR”,name:”Arkansas”,wind:”130 mph”,snow:”15 psf”,permit:”2–4 wk”,slot:”3–5 wk”,note:”Tornado-prone, 12-gauge frame and 26-gauge sheeting widely chosen.”}, {code:”CA”,name:”California”,wind:”110 mph”,snow:”10 psf”,permit:”4–8 wk”,slot:”4–6 wk”,note:”Seismic anchoring required. ADU configuration qualifies for streamlined SB 9 / SB 35 permitting.”}, {code:”CO”,name:”Colorado”,wind:”120 mph”,snow:”55 psf”,permit:”3–5 wk”,slot:”5–7 wk”,note:”High-altitude snow: 65 psf required above 7,500 ft. Insulation strongly recommended.”}, {code:”CT”,name:”Connecticut”,wind:”130 mph”,snow:”40 psf”,permit:”3–5 wk”,slot:”4–6 wk”,note:”Coastal CT requires 150 mph wind upgrade.”}, {code:”DE”,name:”Delaware”,wind:”130 mph”,snow:”25 psf”,permit:”2–3 wk”,slot:”3–5 wk”,note:”Coastal salt-air, galvanized frame upgrade recommended for longevity.”}, {code:”FL”,name:”Florida”,wind:”160 mph”,snow:”0 psf”,permit:”3–6 wk”,slot:”3–5 wk”,note:”Hurricane zone, 12-gauge frame and Miami-Dade approved anchoring required. HVHZ certification available.”}, {code:”GA”,name:”Georgia”,wind:”130 mph”,snow:”10 psf”,permit:”2–4 wk”,slot:”3–5 wk”,note:”Coastal counties need 140+ mph. Atlanta metro permits run 3-4 weeks.”}, {code:”ID”,name:”Idaho”,wind:”110 mph”,snow:”35 psf”,permit:”3–5 wk”,slot:”4–6 wk”,note:”Mountain regions: 50 psf snow. Frost depth foundation specs required above 5,000 ft.”}, {code:”IL”,name:”Illinois”,wind:”120 mph”,snow:”25 psf”,permit:”3–5 wk”,slot:”4–6 wk”,note:”Chicago Suburbs require 130 mph + 30 psf snow.”}, {code:”IN”,name:”Indiana”,wind:”120 mph”,snow:”25 psf”,permit:”2–4 wk”,slot:”3–5 wk”,note:”Standard certification works statewide. NW Indiana may need 35 psf.”}, {code:”IA”,name:”Iowa”,wind:”130 mph”,snow:”30 psf”,permit:”2–4 wk”,slot:”4–6 wk”,note:”Tornado-prone, 12-gauge frame upgrade common.”}, {code:”KS”,name:”Kansas”,wind:”140 mph”,snow:”20 psf”,permit:”2–3 wk”,slot:”3–5 wk”,note:”Tornado Alley center, 12-gauge frame strongly recommended.”}, {code:”KY”,name:”Kentucky”,wind:”130 mph”,snow:”15 psf”,permit:”2–3 wk”,slot:”3–5 wk”,note:”Eastern KY mountain counties need 25 psf snow.”}, {code:”LA”,name:”Louisiana”,wind:”150 mph”,snow:”0 psf”,permit:”3–5 wk”,slot:”3–5 wk”,note:”Hurricane zone south of I-10, 12-gauge frame and elevated foundation common.”}, {code:”ME”,name:”Maine”,wind:”110 mph”,snow:”55 psf”,permit:”3–5 wk”,slot:”5–7 wk”,note:”Heavy snow, 65 psf upgrade common. R-19 insulation recommended.”}, {code:”MD”,name:”Maryland”,wind:”130 mph”,snow:”30 psf”,permit:”3–5 wk”,slot:”3–5 wk”,note:”Standard cert fits. Eastern Shore may need 140 mph upgrade.”}, {code:”MA”,name:”Massachusetts”,wind:”130 mph”,snow:”45 psf”,permit:”4–6 wk”,slot:”5–7 wk”,note:”Cape Cod and Islands require 150 mph wind.”}, {code:”MI”,name:”Michigan”,wind:”110 mph”,snow:”40 psf”,permit:”2–4 wk”,slot:”4–6 wk”,note:”Upper Peninsula: 60 psf snow.”}, {code:”MN”,name:”Minnesota”,wind:”110 mph”,snow:”50 psf”,permit:”3–5 wk”,slot:”5–7 wk”,note:”Northern MN: 65 psf snow required.”}, {code:”MS”,name:”Mississippi”,wind:”140 mph”,snow:”5 psf”,permit:”2–4 wk”,slot:”3–5 wk”,note:”Gulf Coast counties: 150 mph wind cert required.”}, {code:”MO”,name:”Missouri”,wind:”130 mph”,snow:”20 psf”,permit:”2–4 wk”,slot:”3–5 wk”,note:”Tornado-prone, 12-gauge frame strongly recommended.”}, {code:”MT”,name:”Montana”,wind:”120 mph”,snow:”40 psf”,permit:”3–5 wk”,slot:”5–8 wk”,note:”Mountain counties need 60+ psf snow. Remote delivery surcharges may apply.”}, {code:”NE”,name:”Nebraska”,wind:”130 mph”,snow:”30 psf”,permit:”2–3 wk”,slot:”3–5 wk”,note:”Tornado Alley, 12-gauge upgrade strongly chosen.”}, {code:”NV”,name:”Nevada”,wind:”100 mph”,snow:”5 psf”,permit:”2–3 wk”,slot:”3–5 wk”,note:”Reflective roof recommended.”}, {code:”NH”,name:”New Hampshire”,wind:”110 mph”,snow:”50 psf”,permit:”3–5 wk”,slot:”5–7 wk”,note:”Northern NH: 65 psf snow.”}, {code:”NJ”,name:”New Jersey”,wind:”130 mph”,snow:”30 psf”,permit:”4–6 wk”,slot:”4–6 wk”,note:”Shore counties: 140 mph wind.”}, {code:”NM”,name:”New Mexico”,wind:”100 mph”,snow:”20 psf”,permit:”2–4 wk”,slot:”3–5 wk”,note:”High-altitude builds need 35 psf snow load.”}, {code:”NY”,name:”New York”,wind:”120 mph”,snow:”45 psf”,permit:”4–6 wk”,slot:”5–7 wk”,note:”NYC area requires extensive permitting. Upstate: 50–65 psf snow.”}, {code:”NC”,name:”North Carolina”,wind:”140 mph”,snow:”15 psf”,permit:”2–4 wk”,slot:”3–5 wk”,note:”Coastal counties: 150 mph wind cert. Mountain region: 30+ psf snow.”}, {code:”ND”,name:”North Dakota”,wind:”110 mph”,snow:”40 psf”,permit:”2–4 wk”,slot:”4–6 wk”,note:”Severe winters, 12-gauge frame standard, R-19 insulation common.”}, {code:”OH”,name:”Ohio”,wind:”110 mph”,snow:”25 psf”,permit:”2–4 wk”,slot:”3–5 wk”,note:”Standard certification fits statewide.”}, {code:”OK”,name:”Oklahoma”,wind:”140 mph”,snow:”10 psf”,permit:”2–3 wk”,slot:”3–5 wk”,note:”Tornado Alley, 12-gauge frame standard, safe room option available.”}, {code:”OR”,name:”Oregon”,wind:”100 mph”,snow:”35 psf”,permit:”3–5 wk”,slot:”5–7 wk”,note:”Coastal: 110 mph. ADU configuration qualifies for HB 2001 streamlined permitting.”}, {code:”PA”,name:”Pennsylvania”,wind:”110 mph”,snow:”35 psf”,permit:”3–5 wk”,slot:”4–6 wk”,note:”Snow belt counties: 50 psf required.”}, {code:”RI”,name:”Rhode Island”,wind:”130 mph”,snow:”40 psf”,permit:”4–6 wk”,slot:”5–7 wk”,note:”Coastal: 150 mph wind.”}, {code:”SC”,name:”South Carolina”,wind:”140 mph”,snow:”10 psf”,permit:”2–4 wk”,slot:”3–5 wk”,note:”Coastal counties: 150 mph cert required.”}, {code:”SD”,name:”South Dakota”,wind:”120 mph”,snow:”35 psf”,permit:”2–3 wk”,slot:”3–5 wk”,note:”Black Hills region: 50 psf.”}, {code:”TN”,name:”Tennessee”,wind:”130 mph”,snow:”15 psf”,permit:”2–4 wk”,slot:”3–5 wk”,note:”East TN mountains need 30 psf snow.”}, {code:”TX”,name:”Texas”,wind:”140 mph”,snow:”5 psf”,permit:”2–4 wk”,slot:”3–5 wk”,note:”Coast: 150 mph + windborne debris cert. Panhandle: 130 mph.”}, {code:”UT”,name:”Utah”,wind:”100 mph”,snow:”30 psf”,permit:”2–4 wk”,slot:”3–5 wk”,note:”Mountain counties: 50–65 psf snow.”}, {code:”VT”,name:”Vermont”,wind:”110 mph”,snow:”55 psf”,permit:”3–5 wk”,slot:”5–7 wk”,note:”Heavy snow, 65 psf standard. Insulation strongly recommended.”}, {code:”VA”,name:”Virginia”,wind:”130 mph”,snow:”25 psf”,permit:”2–4 wk”,slot:”3–5 wk”,note:”Tidewater: 140 mph. Blue Ridge: 35 psf snow.”}, {code:”WA”,name:”Washington”,wind:”100 mph”,snow:”25 psf”,permit:”3–5 wk”,slot:”4–6 wk”,note:”Cascade Mountains: 50+ psf snow. ADU permitting streamlined statewide.”}, {code:”WV”,name:”West Virginia”,wind:”110 mph”,snow:”30 psf”,permit:”2–4 wk”,slot:”4–6 wk”,note:”Mountain terrain, site access review required.”}, {code:”WI”,name:”Wisconsin”,wind:”110 mph”,snow:”40 psf”,permit:”3–5 wk”,slot:”4–6 wk”,note:”Northern WI: 60 psf snow load.”}, {code:”WY”,name:”Wyoming”,wind:”130 mph”,snow:”40 psf”,permit:”2–4 wk”,slot:”4–6 wk”,note:”High wind statewide, 12-gauge frame standard.”} ]; let CURRENT = {variant:’workshop’, size:’16×50′, height:’9′, color:’slate’, imgIdx:0}; function parseSize(sizeId){const m=sizeId.match(/(d+)x(d+)/);return m?[parseInt(m[1]),parseInt(m[2])]:[20,40];} function setVariant(v, opts){ opts = opts || {}; const data = VARIANTS[v]; if(!data) return; const prevSize = CURRENT.size, prevColor = CURRENT.color; CURRENT.variant = v; if(!opts.preserveSubs){ const matchSize = data.sizes.find(s=>s.id===prevSize); CURRENT.size = matchSize ? matchSize.id : (data.sizes.find(s=>s.current)||data.sizes[0]).id; const matchColor = data.colors.find(c=>c.id===prevColor); CURRENT.color = matchColor ? matchColor.id : (data.colors.find(c=>c.popular)||data.colors[0]).id; CURRENT.height = (data.heights.find(h=>h.current)||data.heights[0]).id; CURRENT.imgIdx = 0; } document.getElementById(‘sx-root’).dataset.variant = v; document.getElementById(‘config-display’).textContent = data.name; document.getElementById(‘hero-tag’).textContent = data.heroTag; document.getElementById(‘sku-id’).textContent = data.sku; document.getElementById(‘units-sold’).textContent = data.units; document.getElementById(‘review-count’).textContent = data.reviews; document.getElementById(‘hero-bullets’)._sxNoClobberInnerHTML = /* pre-rendered hero-bullets */ data.bullets.map(b=>`
` ).join(”); /* Schema with Google Merchant Center fields */ const curColor = data.colors.find(c=>c.id===CURRENT.color)||data.colors[0]; document.getElementById(‘sx-schema-product’).textContent = JSON.stringify({ “@context”:”https://schema.org”,”@type”:”Product”, “name”:`${sizeLabel} ${data.name}`,”sku”:data.sku,”mpn”:data.sku, “gtin13″:”0860000″ + data.sku.replace(/D/g,”).padEnd(6,’0′).slice(0,6), “description”:tagline,”image”:data.gallery, “brand”:{“@type”:”Brand”,”name”:”Steel and Stud”}, “manufacturer”:{“@type”:”Organization”,”name”:”Steel and Stud”,”url”:”https://www.steelandstud.com/”}, “category”:”Buildings & Sheds > Garages”, “material”:”Galvanized Steel”,”color”:curColor.name, “weight”:{“@type”:”QuantitativeValue”,”value”:Math.round(sqft*4.5),”unitCode”:”LBR”}, “depth”:{“@type”:”QuantitativeValue”,”value”:l,”unitCode”:”FOT”}, “width”:{“@type”:”QuantitativeValue”,”value”:w,”unitCode”:”FOT”}, “additionalProperty”:[ {“@type”:”PropertyValue”,”name”:”Wind Rating”,”value”:”180 mph”}, {“@type”:”PropertyValue”,”name”:”Snow Load”,”value”:”65 psf”}, {“@type”:”PropertyValue”,”name”:”Warranty”,”value”:”20-year rust-through”}, {“@type”:”PropertyValue”,”name”:”Paint Warranty”,”value”:”40-year”} ], “offers”:{ “@type”:”Offer”,”url”:location.href, “price”:sz.price.toString(),”priceCurrency”:”USD”, “priceValidUntil”:”2026-12-31″,”availability”:”https://schema.org/InStock”, “itemCondition”:”https://schema.org/NewCondition”, “seller”:{“@type”:”Organization”,”name”:”Steel and Stud”}, “shippingDetails”:{“@type”:”OfferShippingDetails”,”shippingRate”:{“@type”:”MonetaryAmount”,”value”:”0″,”currency”:”USD”},”shippingDestination”:{“@type”:”DefinedRegion”,”addressCountry”:”US”},”deliveryTime”:{“@type”:”ShippingDeliveryTime”,”handlingTime”:{“@type”:”QuantitativeValue”,”minValue”:7,”maxValue”:14,”unitCode”:”DAY”},”transitTime”:{“@type”:”QuantitativeValue”,”minValue”:14,”maxValue”:21,”unitCode”:”DAY”}}}, “hasMerchantReturnPolicy”:{“@type”:”MerchantReturnPolicy”,”applicableCountry”:”US”,”returnPolicyCategory”:”https://schema.org/MerchantReturnFiniteReturnWindow”,”merchantReturnDays”:7,”returnMethod”:”https://schema.org/ReturnByMail”,”returnFees”:”https://schema.org/RestockingFees”} } }); document.getElementById(‘sx-schema-faq’).textContent = JSON.stringify({ “@context”:”https://schema.org”,”@type”:”FAQPage”, “mainEntity”:data.faqs.map(f=>({“@type”:”Question”,”name”:f[0],”acceptedAnswer”:{“@type”:”Answer”,”text”:f[1].replace(/]+>/g,”)}})) }); recalcPrice(); trackRecentlyViewed(data, sizeLabel); renderRecentlyViewed(); } function buildPAA(data, sizeLabel, sqft){ const [w,l] = parseSize(CURRENT.size); return [ [`How much does a ${sizeLabel} ${data.name.toLowerCase()} cost?`, `A ${sizeLabel} ${data.name.toLowerCase()} starts at $${data.price.toLocaleString()} for the base build with free delivery and installation included. Fully-outfitted with the 12-gauge frame, R-19 insulation, walk-in door, and additional windows typically brings the total to $${Math.round(data.price * 1.45).toLocaleString()}–$${Math.round(data.price * 1.65).toLocaleString()}. Most buyers finance with $0 down rent-to-own for around $${data.monthly}/month.`], [`Is a ${sizeLabel} metal garage better than wood construction?`, `Yes, for cost, longevity, and maintenance. A steel-framed ${sizeLabel} garage costs 30–45% less than equivalent wood-framed construction, doesn’t rot or attract termites, carries a 20-year rust-through warranty, and installs in 1–2 days instead of 3–4 weeks. Steel also resists fire, wind, and snow load significantly better than wood at the same price point.`], [`Do I need a building permit for a ${sqft} sq ft metal building?`, `Almost always. Buildings over 200 sq ft require an accessory building permit in most U.S. counties. We email engineered drawings stamped for your wind and snow zone at no charge, you file these with your local building department. Permit timing varies 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.`], [`What foundation does a ${sizeLabel} metal building need?`, `A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is recommended for any enclosed garage. For your ${sizeLabel}, that’s a ${w+1}′ × ${l+1}′ × 4″ slab. We can also anchor to asphalt or compacted gravel for carport uses. Concrete pour typically costs $2,400–$3,200; bundled pad pour available for $2,890.`], [`How long does a metal garage actually last?`, `A properly anchored Steel and Stud metal garage is engineered for a 50+ year service life. The galvanized steel frame carries a 20-year rust-through warranty, factory-baked paint carries a 40-year warranty, and panels are warranted against perforation. Industry data shows steel buildings outlast wood-framed by 2–3× before requiring major repair.`], [`Can I get financing without a credit check for a ${sizeLabel} garage?`, `Yes. Our rent-to-own partner TimePayment does not pull credit. Provide ID, proof of income (2 pay stubs), and your first month’s payment. Approvals typically happen within 8 minutes. Spread payments across 36–60 months, no balloon, no early-payoff penalty. Typical RTO payment on your ${sizeLabel}: $${data.monthly}/month.`], [`How fast can I get a metal garage installed?`, `Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to installation. Fabrication, free regional delivery, and installation by our certified crew in 1–2 days on a prepared pad. Rush delivery (1–2 weeks) is available in some metros for $345.`], [`Will a ${sizeLabel} metal building meet HOA / county requirements?`, `In most cases yes. Our engineered drawings meet IRC and IBC standards for accessory buildings. Many HOAs accept the standard metal exterior; some require dimensional trim or matching house color (we color-match). Most counties have 12–15 ft height limits, fine for standard 9–10 ft wall builds.`] ]; } function buildDescription(data, sizeLabel, sqft, w, l){ const v = data.name.toLowerCase(); return `
${sqft}sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$${data.monthly}/mo
From RTO
🏗️
Engineered for your county
Every ${sizeLabel} ${v} is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.
Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩
Construction details
The same materials commercial fabricators use, not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.
Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚
Free delivery & install, really free
Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.
$0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
3–5 week lead time on regional routes
All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️
Warranty & lifespan
Three independent warranties cover the structure, the finish, and the workmanship, and the practical service life of the building exceeds them all.
20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳
$0-down financing
Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all, fastest path to a closed deal.
RTO: $${data.monthly}/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders
⚡
Why ${sizeLabel}?
${sqft} sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial, fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.
${w}′ × ${l}′ footprint with ${sqft} sq ft interior
Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
Resale ROI $${Math.round(sqft*8).toLocaleString()}–$${Math.round(sqft*12).toLocaleString()} added home value
800 sq ft for compact garage, RV cover, or carport
16′ x 50′14 GaugeLocal Certification Available
Pre-engineered 16×50 steel building delivers 800 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
Leg height adjustable up to 20'
$11,800.00
Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
648 sq ft for compact garage, RV cover, or carport
18′ x 36′14 GaugeLocal Certification Available
Pre-engineered 18×36 steel building delivers 648 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
18×36 One-Car Garage with Workshop | Steel and Stud, From $9,550
18×36 One-Car Garage with Workshop, built for daily backyard use.
Built for homeowners who want more covered space, this 18×36 one-car garage with workshop packs 648 sq ft into a code-compliant shell. Homeowners pick this layout when one car needs covered parking and the rest of the.
You’re viewing:One-Car Garage with Workshop·Size18×36·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$9,550$10,900Save $1,350
or as low as $199/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You’ll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request, no surprises, no hidden fees.
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-18X36-ONE-CAR-GARAGE-WBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
★
4.8/5
customer rating
⏱
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We’ve provided builds for
SPATIAL LAYOUT
See how 800 sq ft fits your 18×36 one-car garage with workshop.
18 feet wide × 36 feet long. Built for homeowners who want more covered space, this 18×36 one-car garage with workshop packs 648 sq ft into a code-compliant shell.
One-Car Garage with Workshop layout.
Built for homeowners who want more covered space, this 18×36 one-car garage with workshop packs 648 sq ft into a code-compliant shell. Homeowners pick this layout when one car needs covered parking and the rest of the space is dedicated to a real workbench, pegboard wall, and rolling tool chests. A 9-foot roll-up at the gable end keeps the side wall free for a 20-foot bench. The leftover 15 feet behind the bumper handles a band saw, miter station, and shelving.
💡 Pro tip:One-Car Garage with Workshop works well at 18×36, add insulation + electrical for year-round use.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER
Build your 18×36 One-Car Garage with Workshop in 3D.
Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer, drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.
Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim, mix & match
Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
Auto-syncs to quote, what you build is what we price
All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.
🏗️
648 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 18×36 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
One-Car Garage with Workshop spec sheet.
Width18′
Length36′ + 6" overhang
Side height9′ standard
Floor space648 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES
How real buyers use One-Car Garage with Workshop.
DAILY USE
Everyday one-car garage with workshop
648 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a one-car garage with workshop.
STORAGE OVERFLOW
one-car garage with workshop + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOM
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.
FULL PRODUCT DETAILS
18×36 One-Car Garage with Workshop, what makes it different.
648sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$199/mo
From RTO
🏗️
Engineered for your county
Every 18×36 one-car garage with workshop is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.
Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩
Construction details
The same materials commercial fabricators use, not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.
Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚
Free delivery & install, really free
Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.
$0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
3–5 week lead time on regional routes
All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️
Warranty & lifespan
Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.
20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳
$0-down financing
Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all, fastest path to a closed deal.
RTO: $199/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders
⚡
Why 18×36?
648 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial, fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.
18′ × 36′ footprint with 648 sq ft interior
Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
Resale ROI $5,184–$7,776 added home value
PEOPLE ALSO ASK
Common questions from One-Car Garage with Workshop shoppers.
The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.
How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 18×36 metal building?
Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.
Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?
Yes, free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.
What’s the typical lead time for a 18×36 building?
Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.
Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?
Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month’s payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.
What’s covered under the 20-year warranty?
Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.
CUSTOMER REVIEWS
What real 18×36 One-Car Garage with Workshop buyers say.
⭐
No reviews yet for the 18×36 One-Car Garage with Workshop
Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.
How much does a 18×36 one-car garage with workshop cost?
A 18×36 one-car garage with workshop from Steel and Stud starts at $9,550 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $199/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.
Is delivery and installation included in the 18×36 one-car garage with workshop price?
Yes, every Steel and Stud one-car garage with workshop ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.
Do I need a permit for a 18×36 one-car garage with workshop?
Almost always for 648+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.
How is a Steel and Stud one-car garage with workshop different from a wood-frame build?
Steel solves the problems wood creates, no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.
What foundation does a 18×36 one-car garage with workshop need?
A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don’t already have a slab.
How fast can I get a 18×36 one-car garage with workshop delivered?
Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available, call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.
Can I finance a 18×36 one-car garage with workshop without a credit check?
Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month’s payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $199/month on a 18×36 one-car garage with workshop.
What warranty comes with the 18×36 one-car garage with workshop?
Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.
Can I customize the 18×36 one-car garage with workshop in 3D before I order?
Yes, our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.
Does a 18×36 one-car garage with workshop add resale value to my home?
An enclosed 18×36 one-car garage with workshop typically adds $5,184–$7,776 in resale value per regional comp data, and most insurance carriers reduce premiums for indoor vehicle / equipment storage. Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust warranty transfers to the next owner.
Ready to build?
Your One-Car Garage with Workshop quote takes one minute.
Tell us your zip and the options you want. We’ll send back a same-day, all-in price.
648 sq ft for compact garage, RV cover, or carport
18′ x 36′14 GaugeLocal Certification Available
Pre-engineered 18×36 steel building delivers 648 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
Leg height adjustable up to 20'
$9,550.00
Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
648 sq ft for compact garage, RV cover, or carport
18′ x 36′14 GaugeLocal Certification Available
Pre-engineered 18×36 steel building delivers 648 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
18×36 RV Cover with Storage | Steel and Stud, From $9,550
18×36 RV Cover with Storage, built for hobby and recreational use.
RV owners who park a Class C motorhome or fifth-wheel under 35 feet use the 18×36 vertical roof metal building as a tall, narrow shelter. The 18-ft width clears slide-outs, and the 36-ft length covers tongue and bumper.
You’re viewing:RV Cover with Storage·Size18×36·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$9,550$10,900Save $1,350
or as low as $199/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You’ll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request, no surprises, no hidden fees.
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-18X36-RV-COVER-STORAGEBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
★
4.8/5
customer rating
⏱
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We’ve provided builds for
SPATIAL LAYOUT
See how 800 sq ft fits your 18×36 rv cover with storage.
18 feet wide × 36 feet long. RV owners who park a Class C motorhome or fifth-wheel under 35 feet use the 18×36 vertical roof metal building as a tall, narrow shelter.
RV Cover with Storage layout.
RV owners who park a Class C motorhome or fifth-wheel under 35 feet use the 18×36 vertical roof metal building as a tall, narrow shelter. The 18-ft width clears slide-outs, and the 36-ft length covers tongue and bumper with margin for a deep-cycle battery cabinet.
💡 Pro tip:RV Cover with Storage works well at 18×36, add insulation + electrical for year-round use.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER
Build your 18×36 RV Cover with Storage in 3D.
Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer, drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.
Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim, mix & match
Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
Auto-syncs to quote, what you build is what we price
All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.
🏗️
648 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 18×36 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
RV Cover with Storage spec sheet.
Width18′
Length36′ + 6" overhang
Side height9′ standard
Floor space648 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES
How real buyers use RV Cover with Storage.
DAILY USE
Everyday rv cover with storage
648 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a rv cover with storage.
STORAGE OVERFLOW
rv cover with storage + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOM
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.
FULL PRODUCT DETAILS
18×36 RV Cover with Storage, what makes it different.
648sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$199/mo
From RTO
🏗️
Engineered for your county
Every 18×36 rv cover with storage is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.
Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩
Construction details
The same materials commercial fabricators use, not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.
Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚
Free delivery & install, really free
Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.
$0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
3–5 week lead time on regional routes
All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️
Warranty & lifespan
Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.
20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳
$0-down financing
Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all, fastest path to a closed deal.
RTO: $199/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders
⚡
Why 18×36?
648 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial, fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.
18′ × 36′ footprint with 648 sq ft interior
Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
Resale ROI $5,184–$7,776 added home value
PEOPLE ALSO ASK
Common questions from RV Cover with Storage shoppers.
The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.
How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 18×36 metal building?
Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.
Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?
Yes, free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.
What’s the typical lead time for a 18×36 building?
Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.
Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?
Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month’s payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.
What’s covered under the 20-year warranty?
Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.
CUSTOMER REVIEWS
What real 18×36 RV Cover with Storage buyers say.
⭐
No reviews yet for the 18×36 RV Cover with Storage
Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.
A 18×36 rv cover with storage from Steel and Stud starts at $9,550 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $199/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.
Is delivery and installation included in the 18×36 rv cover with storage price?
Yes, every Steel and Stud rv cover with storage ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.
Do I need a permit for a 18×36 rv cover with storage?
Almost always for 648+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.
How is a Steel and Stud rv cover with storage different from a wood-frame build?
Steel solves the problems wood creates, no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.
What foundation does a 18×36 rv cover with storage need?
A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don’t already have a slab.
How fast can I get a 18×36 rv cover with storage delivered?
Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available, call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.
Can I finance a 18×36 rv cover with storage without a credit check?
Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month’s payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $199/month on a 18×36 rv cover with storage.
What warranty comes with the 18×36 rv cover with storage?
Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.
Can I customize the 18×36 rv cover with storage in 3D before I order?
Yes, our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.
Can I insulate the 18×36 rv cover with storage for year-round use?
Yes, Steel and Stud offers R-13 wall + R-19 ceiling insulation packages, and the interior is drywall-ready. Most owners finish a rv cover with storage to a livable retreat in 2–3 weekends. Add a mini-split HVAC at checkout for full four-season comfort.
Ready to build?
Your RV Cover with Storage quote takes one minute.
Tell us your zip and the options you want. We’ll send back a same-day, all-in price.
648 sq ft for compact garage, RV cover, or carport
18′ x 36′14 GaugeLocal Certification Available
Pre-engineered 18×36 steel building delivers 648 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
Leg height adjustable up to 20'
$9,550.00
Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
648 sq ft for compact garage, RV cover, or carport
18′ x 36′14 GaugeLocal Certification Available
Pre-engineered 18×36 steel building delivers 648 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
18×36 Detached Workshop | Steel and Stud, From $9,550
18×36 Detached Workshop, built for daily backyard use.
Looking for a 18×36 detached workshop? At 648 sq ft, this footprint suits homeowners adding garage, workshop, or hobby space. Tradespeople ordering a 18×36 metal workshop want a fully enclosed shop with a personnel.
Starting from your selected configuration$9,550$10,900Save $1,350
or as low as $199/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You’ll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request, no surprises, no hidden fees.
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-18X36-DETACHED-WORKSHOBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
★
4.8/5
customer rating
⏱
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We’ve provided builds for
SPATIAL LAYOUT
See how 800 sq ft fits your 18×36 detached workshop.
18 feet wide × 36 feet long. Looking for a 18×36 detached workshop? At 648 sq ft, this footprint suits homeowners adding garage, workshop, or hobby space.
Detached Workshop layout.
Looking for a 18×36 detached workshop? At 648 sq ft, this footprint suits homeowners adding garage, workshop, or hobby space. Tradespeople ordering a 18×36 metal workshop want a fully enclosed shop with a personnel door, two windows for natural light, and a 18×36 roll-up for moving lumber or equipment in. Insulated walls and a 4:12 pitch keep the space usable year-round. 648 sq ft handles a table saw, router table, and assembly bench without crowding.
💡 Pro tip:Detached Workshop works well at 18×36, add insulation + electrical for year-round use.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER
Build your 18×36 Detached Workshop in 3D.
Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer, drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.
Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim, mix & match
Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
Auto-syncs to quote, what you build is what we price
All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.
🏗️
648 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 18×36 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
Detached Workshop spec sheet.
Width18′
Length36′ + 6" overhang
Side height9′ standard
Floor space648 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES
How real buyers use Detached Workshop.
DAILY USE
Everyday detached workshop
648 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a detached workshop.
STORAGE OVERFLOW
detached workshop + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOM
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.
FULL PRODUCT DETAILS
18×36 Detached Workshop, what makes it different.
648sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$199/mo
From RTO
🏗️
Engineered for your county
Every 18×36 detached workshop is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.
Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩
Construction details
The same materials commercial fabricators use, not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.
Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚
Free delivery & install, really free
Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.
$0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
3–5 week lead time on regional routes
All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️
Warranty & lifespan
Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.
20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳
$0-down financing
Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all, fastest path to a closed deal.
RTO: $199/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders
⚡
Why 18×36?
648 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial, fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.
18′ × 36′ footprint with 648 sq ft interior
Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
Resale ROI $5,184–$7,776 added home value
PEOPLE ALSO ASK
Common questions from Detached Workshop shoppers.
The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.
How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 18×36 metal building?
Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.
Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?
Yes, free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.
What’s the typical lead time for a 18×36 building?
Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.
Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?
Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month’s payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.
What’s covered under the 20-year warranty?
Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.
CUSTOMER REVIEWS
What real 18×36 Detached Workshop buyers say.
⭐
No reviews yet for the 18×36 Detached Workshop
Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.
A 18×36 detached workshop from Steel and Stud starts at $9,550 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $199/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.
Is delivery and installation included in the 18×36 detached workshop price?
Yes, every Steel and Stud detached workshop ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.
Do I need a permit for a 18×36 detached workshop?
Almost always for 648+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.
How is a Steel and Stud detached workshop different from a wood-frame build?
Steel solves the problems wood creates, no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.
What foundation does a 18×36 detached workshop need?
A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don’t already have a slab.
How fast can I get a 18×36 detached workshop delivered?
Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available, call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.
Can I finance a 18×36 detached workshop without a credit check?
Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month’s payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $199/month on a 18×36 detached workshop.
What warranty comes with the 18×36 detached workshop?
Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.
Can I customize the 18×36 detached workshop in 3D before I order?
Yes, our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.
Does a 18×36 detached workshop add resale value to my home?
An enclosed 18×36 detached workshop typically adds $5,184–$7,776 in resale value per regional comp data, and most insurance carriers reduce premiums for indoor vehicle / equipment storage. Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust warranty transfers to the next owner.
Ready to build?
Your Detached Workshop quote takes one minute.
Tell us your zip and the options you want. We’ll send back a same-day, all-in price.
648 sq ft for compact garage, RV cover, or carport
18′ x 36′14 GaugeLocal Certification Available
Pre-engineered 18×36 steel building delivers 648 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
Leg height adjustable up to 20'
$9,550.00
Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
648 sq ft for compact garage, RV cover, or carport
18′ x 36′14 GaugeLocal Certification Available
Pre-engineered 18×36 steel building delivers 648 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
18×36 Hobby Farm Utility Building | Steel and Stud, From $10,200
18×36 Hobby Farm Utility Building, built for farm and ranch demands.
Our 18×36 hobby farm utility building fits 18-foot widths and 36-foot lengths to give you durable cover that handles snow, wind, and feed loads. Two sliding barn doors at each gable let a tractor drive through.
Starting from your selected configuration$10,200$11,650Save $1,450
or as low as $213/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You’ll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request, no surprises, no hidden fees.
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-18X36-HOBBY-FARM-UTILIBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
★
4.8/5
customer rating
⏱
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We’ve provided builds for
SPATIAL LAYOUT
See how 800 sq ft fits your 18×36 hobby farm utility building.
18 feet wide × 36 feet long. Our 18×36 hobby farm utility building fits 18-foot widths and 36-foot lengths to give you durable cover that handles snow, wind, and feed loads.
Hobby Farm Utility Building layout.
Our 18×36 hobby farm utility building fits 18-foot widths and 36-foot lengths to give you durable cover that handles snow, wind, and feed loads. Two sliding barn doors at each gable let a tractor drive through end-to-end. Side wall lean-tos can be added later for hay storage or a covered wash rack.
💡 Pro tip:Hobby Farm Utility Building works well at 18×36, add insulation + electrical for year-round use.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER
Build your 18×36 Hobby Farm Utility Building in 3D.
Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer, drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.
Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim, mix & match
Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
Auto-syncs to quote, what you build is what we price
All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.
🏗️
648 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 18×36 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
Hobby Farm Utility Building spec sheet.
Width18′
Length36′ + 6" overhang
Side height9′ standard
Floor space648 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES
How real buyers use Hobby Farm Utility Building.
DAILY USE
Everyday hobby farm utility building
648 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a hobby farm utility building.
STORAGE OVERFLOW
hobby farm utility building + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOM
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.
FULL PRODUCT DETAILS
18×36 Hobby Farm Utility Building, what makes it different.
648sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$213/mo
From RTO
🏗️
Engineered for your county
Every 18×36 hobby farm utility building is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.
Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩
Construction details
The same materials commercial fabricators use, not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.
Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚
Free delivery & install, really free
Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.
$0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
3–5 week lead time on regional routes
All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️
Warranty & lifespan
Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.
20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳
$0-down financing
Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all, fastest path to a closed deal.
RTO: $213/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders
⚡
Why 18×36?
648 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial, fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.
18′ × 36′ footprint with 648 sq ft interior
Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
Resale ROI $5,184–$7,776 added home value
PEOPLE ALSO ASK
Common questions from Hobby Farm Utility Building shoppers.
The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.
How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 18×36 metal building?
Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.
Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?
Yes, free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.
What’s the typical lead time for a 18×36 building?
Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.
Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?
Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month’s payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.
What’s covered under the 20-year warranty?
Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.
CUSTOMER REVIEWS
What real 18×36 Hobby Farm Utility Building buyers say.
⭐
No reviews yet for the 18×36 Hobby Farm Utility Building
Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.
How much does a 18×36 hobby farm utility building cost?
A 18×36 hobby farm utility building from Steel and Stud starts at $10,200 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $213/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.
Is delivery and installation included in the 18×36 hobby farm utility building price?
Yes, every Steel and Stud hobby farm utility building ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.
Do I need a permit for a 18×36 hobby farm utility building?
Almost always for 648+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.
How is a Steel and Stud hobby farm utility building different from a wood-frame build?
Steel solves the problems wood creates, no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.
What foundation does a 18×36 hobby farm utility building need?
A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don’t already have a slab.
How fast can I get a 18×36 hobby farm utility building delivered?
Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available, call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.
Can I finance a 18×36 hobby farm utility building without a credit check?
Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month’s payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $213/month on a 18×36 hobby farm utility building.
What warranty comes with the 18×36 hobby farm utility building?
Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.
Can I customize the 18×36 hobby farm utility building in 3D before I order?
Yes, our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.
Will the 18×36 hobby farm utility building stand up to livestock and Midwest weather?
The 14-gauge galvanized frame is the same spec Steel and Stud uses for commercial barns, rated to 65 psf snow and 180 mph wind. Ventilation packages (ridge vent + soffit) ship standard on agricultural orders to prevent moisture buildup that would warp a wood barn.
Ready to build?
Your Hobby Farm Utility Building quote takes one minute.
Tell us your zip and the options you want. We’ll send back a same-day, all-in price.
648 sq ft for compact garage, RV cover, or carport
18′ x 36′14 GaugeLocal Certification Available
Pre-engineered 18×36 steel building delivers 648 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
Leg height adjustable up to 20'
$10,200.00
Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
648 sq ft for compact garage, RV cover, or carport
18′ x 36′14 GaugeLocal Certification Available
Pre-engineered 18×36 steel building delivers 648 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
18×36 Truck and Trailer Garage | Steel and Stud, From $9,550
18×36 Truck and Trailer Garage, built for daily backyard use.
18×36 delivers 648 sq ft of everyday truck and trailer garage space. Buyers with a full-size F-250 plus an open utility trailer use the 18×36 as a tandem garage. The 35-foot length parks the truck and a 16-foot trailer.
You’re viewing:Truck and Trailer Garage·Size18×36·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$9,550$10,900Save $1,350
or as low as $199/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You’ll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request, no surprises, no hidden fees.
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-18X36-TRUCK-TRAILER-GABuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
★
4.8/5
customer rating
⏱
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We’ve provided builds for
SPATIAL LAYOUT
See how 800 sq ft fits your 18×36 truck and trailer garage.
18 feet wide × 36 feet long. 18×36 delivers 648 sq ft of everyday truck and trailer garage space.
Truck and Trailer Garage layout.
18×36 delivers 648 sq ft of everyday truck and trailer garage space. Buyers with a full-size F-250 plus an open utility trailer use the 18×36 as a tandem garage. The 35-foot length parks the truck and a 16-foot trailer end-to-end with room for the tongue jack. 18 feet of width gives you 3 feet of walk-around clearance on each side of a 6.5-foot-wide pickup.
💡 Pro tip:Truck and Trailer Garage works well at 18×36, add insulation + electrical for year-round use.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER
Build your 18×36 Truck and Trailer Garage in 3D.
Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer, drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.
Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim, mix & match
Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
Auto-syncs to quote, what you build is what we price
All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.
🏗️
648 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 18×36 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
Truck and Trailer Garage spec sheet.
Width18′
Length36′ + 6" overhang
Side height9′ standard
Floor space648 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES
How real buyers use Truck and Trailer Garage.
DAILY USE
Everyday truck and trailer garage
648 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a truck and trailer garage.
STORAGE OVERFLOW
truck and trailer garage + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOM
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.
FULL PRODUCT DETAILS
18×36 Truck and Trailer Garage, what makes it different.
648sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$199/mo
From RTO
🏗️
Engineered for your county
Every 18×36 truck and trailer garage is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.
Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩
Construction details
The same materials commercial fabricators use, not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.
Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚
Free delivery & install, really free
Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.
$0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
3–5 week lead time on regional routes
All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️
Warranty & lifespan
Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.
20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳
$0-down financing
Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all, fastest path to a closed deal.
RTO: $199/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders
⚡
Why 18×36?
648 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial, fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.
18′ × 36′ footprint with 648 sq ft interior
Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
Resale ROI $5,184–$7,776 added home value
PEOPLE ALSO ASK
Common questions from Truck and Trailer Garage shoppers.
The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.
How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 18×36 metal building?
Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.
Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?
Yes, free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.
What’s the typical lead time for a 18×36 building?
Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.
Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?
Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month’s payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.
What’s covered under the 20-year warranty?
Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.
CUSTOMER REVIEWS
What real 18×36 Truck and Trailer Garage buyers say.
⭐
No reviews yet for the 18×36 Truck and Trailer Garage
Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.
How much does a 18×36 truck and trailer garage cost?
A 18×36 truck and trailer garage from Steel and Stud starts at $9,550 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $199/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.
Is delivery and installation included in the 18×36 truck and trailer garage price?
Yes, every Steel and Stud truck and trailer garage ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.
Do I need a permit for a 18×36 truck and trailer garage?
Almost always for 648+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.
How is a Steel and Stud truck and trailer garage different from a wood-frame build?
Steel solves the problems wood creates, no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.
What foundation does a 18×36 truck and trailer garage need?
A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don’t already have a slab.
How fast can I get a 18×36 truck and trailer garage delivered?
Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available, call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.
Can I finance a 18×36 truck and trailer garage without a credit check?
Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month’s payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $199/month on a 18×36 truck and trailer garage.
What warranty comes with the 18×36 truck and trailer garage?
Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.
Can I customize the 18×36 truck and trailer garage in 3D before I order?
Yes, our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.
Does a 18×36 truck and trailer garage add resale value to my home?
An enclosed 18×36 truck and trailer garage typically adds $5,184–$7,776 in resale value per regional comp data, and most insurance carriers reduce premiums for indoor vehicle / equipment storage. Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust warranty transfers to the next owner.
Ready to build?
Your Truck and Trailer Garage quote takes one minute.
Tell us your zip and the options you want. We’ll send back a same-day, all-in price.
648 sq ft for compact garage, RV cover, or carport
18′ x 36′14 GaugeLocal Certification Available
Pre-engineered 18×36 steel building delivers 648 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
Leg height adjustable up to 20'
$9,550.00
Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
648 sq ft for compact garage, RV cover, or carport
18′ x 36′14 GaugeLocal Certification Available
Pre-engineered 18×36 steel building delivers 648 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
18×36 Man Cave / She Shed | Steel and Stud, From $9,550
18×36 Man Cave / She Shed, built for hobby and recreational use.
Homeowners convert the 648 sq ft into a finished hangout, insulated walls, three storefront windows, French doors, and a wainscoted exterior that reads more cottage than shed. Big enough for a lounge, a bar, and a.
You’re viewing:Man Cave / She Shed·Size18×36·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$9,550$10,900Save $1,350
or as low as $199/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You’ll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request, no surprises, no hidden fees.
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-18X36-MAN-CAVE-SHE-SHEBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
★
4.8/5
customer rating
⏱
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We’ve provided builds for
SPATIAL LAYOUT
See how 800 sq ft fits your 18×36 man cave / she shed.
18 feet wide × 36 feet long. Homeowners convert the 648 sq ft into a finished hangout, insulated walls, three storefront windows, French doors, and a wainscoted exterior that reads more cottage than shed.
Man Cave / She Shed layout.
Homeowners convert the 648 sq ft into a finished hangout, insulated walls, three storefront windows, French doors, and a wainscoted exterior that reads more cottage than shed. Big enough for a lounge, a bar, and a media wall without feeling like a garage.
💡 Pro tip:Man Cave / She Shed works well at 18×36, add insulation + electrical for year-round use.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER
Build your 18×36 Man Cave / She Shed in 3D.
Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer, drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.
Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim, mix & match
Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
Auto-syncs to quote, what you build is what we price
All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.
🏗️
648 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 18×36 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
Man Cave / She Shed spec sheet.
Width18′
Length36′ + 6" overhang
Side height9′ standard
Floor space648 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES
How real buyers use Man Cave / She Shed.
DAILY USE
Everyday man cave / she shed
648 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a man cave / she shed.
STORAGE OVERFLOW
man cave / she shed + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOM
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.
FULL PRODUCT DETAILS
18×36 Man Cave / She Shed, what makes it different.
648sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$199/mo
From RTO
🏗️
Engineered for your county
Every 18×36 man cave / she shed is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.
Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩
Construction details
The same materials commercial fabricators use, not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.
Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚
Free delivery & install, really free
Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.
$0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
3–5 week lead time on regional routes
All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️
Warranty & lifespan
Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.
20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳
$0-down financing
Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all, fastest path to a closed deal.
RTO: $199/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders
⚡
Why 18×36?
648 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial, fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.
18′ × 36′ footprint with 648 sq ft interior
Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
Resale ROI $5,184–$7,776 added home value
PEOPLE ALSO ASK
Common questions from Man Cave / She Shed shoppers.
The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.
How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 18×36 metal building?
Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.
Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?
Yes, free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.
What’s the typical lead time for a 18×36 building?
Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.
Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?
Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month’s payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.
What’s covered under the 20-year warranty?
Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.
CUSTOMER REVIEWS
What real 18×36 Man Cave / She Shed buyers say.
⭐
No reviews yet for the 18×36 Man Cave / She Shed
Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.
A 18×36 man cave / she shed from Steel and Stud starts at $9,550 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $199/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.
Is delivery and installation included in the 18×36 man cave / she shed price?
Yes, every Steel and Stud man cave / she shed ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.
Do I need a permit for a 18×36 man cave / she shed?
Almost always for 648+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.
How is a Steel and Stud man cave / she shed different from a wood-frame build?
Steel solves the problems wood creates, no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.
What foundation does a 18×36 man cave / she shed need?
A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don’t already have a slab.
How fast can I get a 18×36 man cave / she shed delivered?
Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available, call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.
Can I finance a 18×36 man cave / she shed without a credit check?
Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month’s payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $199/month on a 18×36 man cave / she shed.
What warranty comes with the 18×36 man cave / she shed?
Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.
Can I customize the 18×36 man cave / she shed in 3D before I order?
Yes, our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.
Can I insulate the 18×36 man cave / she shed for year-round use?
Yes, Steel and Stud offers R-13 wall + R-19 ceiling insulation packages, and the interior is drywall-ready. Most owners finish a man cave / she shed to a livable retreat in 2–3 weekends. Add a mini-split HVAC at checkout for full four-season comfort.
Ready to build?
Your Man Cave / She Shed quote takes one minute.
Tell us your zip and the options you want. We’ll send back a same-day, all-in price.
648 sq ft for compact garage, RV cover, or carport
18′ x 36′14 GaugeLocal Certification Available
Pre-engineered 18×36 steel building delivers 648 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
Leg height adjustable up to 20'
$9,550.00
Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
18×36 Contractor Job-Site Tool and Material Storage
648 sq ft for compact garage, RV cover, or carport
18′ x 36′14 GaugeLocal Certification Available
Pre-engineered 18×36 steel building delivers 648 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
18×36 Contractor Job-Site Tool and Material Storage | Steel and Stud — From $11,400
12
18×36 Contractor Job-Site Tool and Material Storage
18×36 Contractor Job-Site Tool and Material Storage, engineered for code-compliant business use.
Built for business owners who need fast permitted occupancy, this 18×36 contractor job-site tool and material storage packs 648 sq ft into a code-compliant shell. Plumbing, electrical, and HVAC contractors use the 18×36.
You're viewing:Contractor Job-Site Tool and Material Storage·Size18×36·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$11,400$13,000Save $1,600
or as low as $238/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You'll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request — no surprises, no hidden fees.
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-18X36-CONTRACTOR-JOB-SBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
★
4.8/5
customer rating
⏱
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We've provided builds for
SPATIAL LAYOUT
See how 800 sq ft fits your jobsite storage layout.
18 feet wide × 36 feet long. Drive-in door for daily load-in/load-out. Built for business owners who need fast permitted occupancy, this 18×36 contractor job-site tool and material storage packs 648 sq ft into a code-compliant shell.
Material racks · Equipment parking · Secure tool cage
Material racks at the front, equipment parking in the middle, secure tool cage at the rear. Capacity: crew tools + materials + small equipment. Plumbing, electrical, and HVAC contractors use the 18×36 as a secure base for tools, fittings, copper, and conduit.
💡 Pro tip:Theft-Resistant. Size affords: tool cage, material racking, site-power panel.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER
Build your 18×36 Contractor Job-Site Tool and Material Storage in 3D.
Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer — drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.
Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim — mix & match
Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
Auto-syncs to quote — what you build is what we price
Everything in your Contractor Job-Site Tool and Material Storage.
All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.
🏗️
648 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 18×36 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
Contractor Job-Site Tool and Material Storage spec sheet.
Width18'
Length36' + 6" overhang
Side height9' standard
Floor space648 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES
How real buyers use Contractor Job-Site Tool and Material Storage.
DAILY USE
Everyday contractor job-site tool and material storage
648 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a contractor job-site tool and material storage.
STORAGE OVERFLOW
contractor job-site tool and material storage + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOM
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.
FULL PRODUCT DETAILS
18×36 Contractor Job-Site Tool and Material Storage — what makes it different.
648sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$238/mo
From RTO
🏗️
Engineered for your county
Every 18×36 contractor job-site tool and material storage is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.
Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩
Construction details
The same materials commercial fabricators use — not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.
Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚
Free delivery & install — really free
Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.
$0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
3–5 week lead time on regional routes
All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️
Warranty & lifespan
Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.
20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳
$0-down financing
Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all — fastest path to a closed deal.
RTO: $238/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders
⚡
Why 18×36?
648 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial — fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.
18′ × 36′ footprint with 648 sq ft interior
Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
Resale ROI $5,184–$7,776 added home value
PEOPLE ALSO ASK
Common questions from Contractor Job-Site Tool and Material Storage shoppers.
The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.
How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 18×36 metal building?
Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.
Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?
Yes — free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.
What's the typical lead time for a 18×36 building?
Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.
Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?
Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month's payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.
What's covered under the 20-year warranty?
Steel and Stud's 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.
CUSTOMER REVIEWS
What real 18×36 Contractor Job-Site Tool and Material Storage buyers say.
⭐
No reviews yet for the 18×36 Contractor Job-Site Tool and Material Storage
Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.
Contractor Job-Site Tool and Material Storage questions, answered.
How much does a 18×36 contractor job-site tool and material storage cost?
A 18×36 contractor job-site tool and material storage from Steel and Stud starts at $11,400 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $238/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.
Is delivery and installation included in the 18×36 contractor job-site tool and material storage price?
Yes — every Steel and Stud contractor job-site tool and material storage ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.
Do I need a permit for a 18×36 contractor job-site tool and material storage?
Almost always for 648+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.
How is a Steel and Stud contractor job-site tool and material storage different from a wood-frame build?
Steel solves the problems wood creates — no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.
What foundation does a 18×36 contractor job-site tool and material storage need?
A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don't already have a slab.
How fast can I get a 18×36 contractor job-site tool and material storage delivered?
Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available — call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.
Can I finance a 18×36 contractor job-site tool and material storage without a credit check?
Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month's payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $238/month on a 18×36 contractor job-site tool and material storage.
What warranty comes with the 18×36 contractor job-site tool and material storage?
Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.
Can I customize the 18×36 contractor job-site tool and material storage in 3D before I order?
Yes — our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.
Does the 18×36 contractor job-site tool and material storage meet IBC commercial code?
Yes. Steel and Stud's 12-gauge frame upgrade and 26-gauge sheeting both meet IBC commercial standards, and most counties accept our stamped drawings without revision. Engineered loads ship with the order — typical certified specs are 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow.
Ready to build?
Your Contractor Job-Site Tool and Material Storage quote takes one minute.
Tell us your zip and the options you want. We'll send back a same-day, all-in price.
18×36 Contractor Job-Site Tool and Material Storage
648 sq ft for compact garage, RV cover, or carport
18′ x 36′14 GaugeLocal Certification Available
Pre-engineered 18×36 steel building delivers 648 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
18×36 Contractor Job-Site Tool and Material Storage | Steel and Stud — From $11,400
12
18×36 Contractor Job-Site Tool and Material Storage
18×36 Contractor Job-Site Tool and Material Storage, engineered for code-compliant business use.
Built for business owners who need fast permitted occupancy, this 18×36 contractor job-site tool and material storage packs 648 sq ft into a code-compliant shell. Plumbing, electrical, and HVAC contractors use the 18×36.
You're viewing:Contractor Job-Site Tool and Material Storage·Size18×36·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$11,400$13,000Save $1,600
or as low as $238/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You'll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request — no surprises, no hidden fees.
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-18X36-CONTRACTOR-JOB-SBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
★
4.8/5
customer rating
⏱
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We've provided builds for
SPATIAL LAYOUT
See how 800 sq ft fits your jobsite storage layout.
18 feet wide × 36 feet long. Drive-in door for daily load-in/load-out. Built for business owners who need fast permitted occupancy, this 18×36 contractor job-site tool and material storage packs 648 sq ft into a code-compliant shell.
Material racks · Equipment parking · Secure tool cage
Material racks at the front, equipment parking in the middle, secure tool cage at the rear. Capacity: crew tools + materials + small equipment. Plumbing, electrical, and HVAC contractors use the 18×36 as a secure base for tools, fittings, copper, and conduit.
💡 Pro tip:Theft-Resistant. Size affords: tool cage, material racking, site-power panel.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER
Build your 18×36 Contractor Job-Site Tool and Material Storage in 3D.
Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer — drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.
Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim — mix & match
Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
Auto-syncs to quote — what you build is what we price
Everything in your Contractor Job-Site Tool and Material Storage.
All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.
🏗️
648 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 18×36 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
Contractor Job-Site Tool and Material Storage spec sheet.
Width18'
Length36' + 6" overhang
Side height9' standard
Floor space648 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES
How real buyers use Contractor Job-Site Tool and Material Storage.
DAILY USE
Everyday contractor job-site tool and material storage
648 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a contractor job-site tool and material storage.
STORAGE OVERFLOW
contractor job-site tool and material storage + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOM
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.
FULL PRODUCT DETAILS
18×36 Contractor Job-Site Tool and Material Storage — what makes it different.
648sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$238/mo
From RTO
🏗️
Engineered for your county
Every 18×36 contractor job-site tool and material storage is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.
Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩
Construction details
The same materials commercial fabricators use — not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.
Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚
Free delivery & install — really free
Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.
$0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
3–5 week lead time on regional routes
All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️
Warranty & lifespan
Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.
20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳
$0-down financing
Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all — fastest path to a closed deal.
RTO: $238/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders
⚡
Why 18×36?
648 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial — fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.
18′ × 36′ footprint with 648 sq ft interior
Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
Resale ROI $5,184–$7,776 added home value
PEOPLE ALSO ASK
Common questions from Contractor Job-Site Tool and Material Storage shoppers.
The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.
How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 18×36 metal building?
Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.
Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?
Yes — free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.
What's the typical lead time for a 18×36 building?
Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.
Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?
Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month's payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.
What's covered under the 20-year warranty?
Steel and Stud's 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.
CUSTOMER REVIEWS
What real 18×36 Contractor Job-Site Tool and Material Storage buyers say.
⭐
No reviews yet for the 18×36 Contractor Job-Site Tool and Material Storage
Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.
Contractor Job-Site Tool and Material Storage questions, answered.
How much does a 18×36 contractor job-site tool and material storage cost?
A 18×36 contractor job-site tool and material storage from Steel and Stud starts at $11,400 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $238/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.
Is delivery and installation included in the 18×36 contractor job-site tool and material storage price?
Yes — every Steel and Stud contractor job-site tool and material storage ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.
Do I need a permit for a 18×36 contractor job-site tool and material storage?
Almost always for 648+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.
How is a Steel and Stud contractor job-site tool and material storage different from a wood-frame build?
Steel solves the problems wood creates — no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.
What foundation does a 18×36 contractor job-site tool and material storage need?
A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don't already have a slab.
How fast can I get a 18×36 contractor job-site tool and material storage delivered?
Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available — call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.
Can I finance a 18×36 contractor job-site tool and material storage without a credit check?
Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month's payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $238/month on a 18×36 contractor job-site tool and material storage.
What warranty comes with the 18×36 contractor job-site tool and material storage?
Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.
Can I customize the 18×36 contractor job-site tool and material storage in 3D before I order?
Yes — our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.
Does the 18×36 contractor job-site tool and material storage meet IBC commercial code?
Yes. Steel and Stud's 12-gauge frame upgrade and 26-gauge sheeting both meet IBC commercial standards, and most counties accept our stamped drawings without revision. Engineered loads ship with the order — typical certified specs are 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow.
Ready to build?
Your Contractor Job-Site Tool and Material Storage quote takes one minute.
Tell us your zip and the options you want. We'll send back a same-day, all-in price.
648 sq ft for compact garage, RV cover, or carport
18′ x 36′14 GaugeLocal Certification Available
Pre-engineered 18×36 steel building delivers 648 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
18×36 Horse Stall and Tack Building | Steel and Stud, From $10,200
18×36 Horse Stall and Tack Building, built for farm and ranch demands.
Built for farm and ranch operations, this 18×36 horse stall and tack building packs 648 sq ft into a code-compliant shell. Rural property owners with two horses use the 18×36 as a two-stall barn with a tack room. The.
You’re viewing:Horse Stall and Tack Building·Size18×36·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$10,200$11,650Save $1,450
or as low as $213/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You’ll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request, no surprises, no hidden fees.
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-18X36-HORSE-STALL-TACKBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
★
4.8/5
customer rating
⏱
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We’ve provided builds for
SPATIAL LAYOUT
See how 800 sq ft fits your 18×36 horse stall and tack building.
18 feet wide × 36 feet long. Built for farm and ranch operations, this 18×36 horse stall and tack building packs 648 sq ft into a code-compliant shell.
Horse Stall and Tack Building layout.
Built for farm and ranch operations, this 18×36 horse stall and tack building packs 648 sq ft into a code-compliant shell. Rural property owners with two horses use the 18×36 as a two-stall barn with a tack room. The 35-foot length divides cleanly into two 18×36 stalls plus an 18×36 tack and feed area. Sliding barn doors at the gable plus a Dutch door on the side give you flexible access.
💡 Pro tip:Horse Stall and Tack Building works well at 18×36, add insulation + electrical for year-round use.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER
Build your 18×36 Horse Stall and Tack Building in 3D.
Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer, drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.
Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim, mix & match
Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
Auto-syncs to quote, what you build is what we price
All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.
🏗️
648 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 18×36 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
Horse Stall and Tack Building spec sheet.
Width18′
Length36′ + 6" overhang
Side height9′ standard
Floor space648 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES
How real buyers use Horse Stall and Tack Building.
DAILY USE
Everyday horse stall and tack building
648 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a horse stall and tack building.
STORAGE OVERFLOW
horse stall and tack building + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOM
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.
FULL PRODUCT DETAILS
18×36 Horse Stall and Tack Building, what makes it different.
648sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$213/mo
From RTO
🏗️
Engineered for your county
Every 18×36 horse stall and tack building is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.
Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩
Construction details
The same materials commercial fabricators use, not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.
Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚
Free delivery & install, really free
Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.
$0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
3–5 week lead time on regional routes
All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️
Warranty & lifespan
Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.
20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳
$0-down financing
Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all, fastest path to a closed deal.
RTO: $213/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders
⚡
Why 18×36?
648 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial, fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.
18′ × 36′ footprint with 648 sq ft interior
Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
Resale ROI $5,184–$7,776 added home value
PEOPLE ALSO ASK
Common questions from Horse Stall and Tack Building shoppers.
The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.
How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 18×36 metal building?
Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.
Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?
Yes, free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.
What’s the typical lead time for a 18×36 building?
Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.
Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?
Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month’s payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.
What’s covered under the 20-year warranty?
Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.
CUSTOMER REVIEWS
What real 18×36 Horse Stall and Tack Building buyers say.
⭐
No reviews yet for the 18×36 Horse Stall and Tack Building
Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.
Horse Stall and Tack Building questions, answered.
How much does a 18×36 horse stall and tack building cost?
A 18×36 horse stall and tack building from Steel and Stud starts at $10,200 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $213/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.
Is delivery and installation included in the 18×36 horse stall and tack building price?
Yes, every Steel and Stud horse stall and tack building ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.
Do I need a permit for a 18×36 horse stall and tack building?
Almost always for 648+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.
How is a Steel and Stud horse stall and tack building different from a wood-frame build?
Steel solves the problems wood creates, no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.
What foundation does a 18×36 horse stall and tack building need?
A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don’t already have a slab.
How fast can I get a 18×36 horse stall and tack building delivered?
Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available, call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.
Can I finance a 18×36 horse stall and tack building without a credit check?
Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month’s payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $213/month on a 18×36 horse stall and tack building.
What warranty comes with the 18×36 horse stall and tack building?
Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.
Can I customize the 18×36 horse stall and tack building in 3D before I order?
Yes, our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.
Will the 18×36 horse stall and tack building stand up to livestock and Midwest weather?
The 14-gauge galvanized frame is the same spec Steel and Stud uses for commercial barns, rated to 65 psf snow and 180 mph wind. Ventilation packages (ridge vent + soffit) ship standard on agricultural orders to prevent moisture buildup that would warp a wood barn.
Ready to build?
Your Horse Stall and Tack Building quote takes one minute.
Tell us your zip and the options you want. We’ll send back a same-day, all-in price.
648 sq ft for compact garage, RV cover, or carport
18′ x 36′14 GaugeLocal Certification Available
Pre-engineered 18×36 steel building delivers 648 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
Leg height adjustable up to 20'
$10,200.00
Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
648 sq ft for compact garage, RV cover, or carport
18′ x 36′14 GaugeLocal Certification Available
Pre-engineered 18×36 steel building delivers 648 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
18×36 Carport with Storage Room | Steel and Stud, From $9,550
18×36 Carport with Storage Room, built for daily backyard use.
Built for homeowners who want more covered space, this 18×36 carport with storage room packs 648 sq ft into a code-compliant shell. A common 18×36 metal carport with storage layout dedicates the front 20 feet as open.
You’re viewing:Carport with Storage Room·Size18×36·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$9,550$10,900Save $1,350
or as low as $199/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You’ll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request, no surprises, no hidden fees.
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-18X36-CARPORT-STORAGE-Built:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
★
4.8/5
customer rating
⏱
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We’ve provided builds for
SPATIAL LAYOUT
See how 800 sq ft fits your 18×36 carport with storage room.
18 feet wide × 36 feet long. Built for homeowners who want more covered space, this 18×36 carport with storage room packs 648 sq ft into a code-compliant shell.
Carport with Storage Room layout.
Built for homeowners who want more covered space, this 18×36 carport with storage room packs 648 sq ft into a code-compliant shell. A common 18×36 metal carport with storage layout dedicates the front 20 feet as open carport for two vehicles parked tandem, and walls in the rear 15 feet as a lockable 270-sq-ft storage room. Mowers, kayaks, and garden tools live behind a 36-inch walk-in door.
💡 Pro tip:Carport with Storage Room works well at 18×36, add insulation + electrical for year-round use.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER
Build your 18×36 Carport with Storage Room in 3D.
Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer, drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.
Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim, mix & match
Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
Auto-syncs to quote, what you build is what we price
All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.
🏗️
648 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 18×36 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
Carport with Storage Room spec sheet.
Width18′
Length36′ + 6" overhang
Side height9′ standard
Floor space648 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES
How real buyers use Carport with Storage Room.
DAILY USE
Everyday carport with storage room
648 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a carport with storage room.
STORAGE OVERFLOW
carport with storage room + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOM
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.
FULL PRODUCT DETAILS
18×36 Carport with Storage Room, what makes it different.
648sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$199/mo
From RTO
🏗️
Engineered for your county
Every 18×36 carport with storage room is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.
Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩
Construction details
The same materials commercial fabricators use, not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.
Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚
Free delivery & install, really free
Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.
$0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
3–5 week lead time on regional routes
All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️
Warranty & lifespan
Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.
20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳
$0-down financing
Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all, fastest path to a closed deal.
RTO: $199/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders
⚡
Why 18×36?
648 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial, fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.
18′ × 36′ footprint with 648 sq ft interior
Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
Resale ROI $5,184–$7,776 added home value
PEOPLE ALSO ASK
Common questions from Carport with Storage Room shoppers.
The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.
How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 18×36 metal building?
Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.
Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?
Yes, free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.
What’s the typical lead time for a 18×36 building?
Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.
Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?
Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month’s payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.
What’s covered under the 20-year warranty?
Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.
CUSTOMER REVIEWS
What real 18×36 Carport with Storage Room buyers say.
⭐
No reviews yet for the 18×36 Carport with Storage Room
Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.
How much does a 18×36 carport with storage room cost?
A 18×36 carport with storage room from Steel and Stud starts at $9,550 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $199/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.
Is delivery and installation included in the 18×36 carport with storage room price?
Yes, every Steel and Stud carport with storage room ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.
Do I need a permit for a 18×36 carport with storage room?
Almost always for 648+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.
How is a Steel and Stud carport with storage room different from a wood-frame build?
Steel solves the problems wood creates, no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.
What foundation does a 18×36 carport with storage room need?
A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don’t already have a slab.
How fast can I get a 18×36 carport with storage room delivered?
Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available, call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.
Can I finance a 18×36 carport with storage room without a credit check?
Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month’s payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $199/month on a 18×36 carport with storage room.
What warranty comes with the 18×36 carport with storage room?
Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.
Can I customize the 18×36 carport with storage room in 3D before I order?
Yes, our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.
Does a 18×36 carport with storage room add resale value to my home?
An enclosed 18×36 carport with storage room typically adds $5,184–$7,776 in resale value per regional comp data, and most insurance carriers reduce premiums for indoor vehicle / equipment storage. Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust warranty transfers to the next owner.
Ready to build?
Your Carport with Storage Room quote takes one minute.
Tell us your zip and the options you want. We’ll send back a same-day, all-in price.
648 sq ft for compact garage, RV cover, or carport
18′ x 36′14 GaugeLocal Certification Available
Pre-engineered 18×36 steel building delivers 648 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
Leg height adjustable up to 20'
$9,550.00
Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
648 sq ft for compact garage, RV cover, or carport
18′ x 36′14 GaugeLocal Certification Available
Pre-engineered 18×36 steel building delivers 648 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
18×36 Fabrication & Welding Shop | Steel and Stud, From $11,400
18×36 Fabrication & Welding Shop, engineered for code-compliant business use.
Our 18×36 fabrication & welding shop fits 18-foot widths and 36-foot lengths to give you a code-passing shell delivered in 4–6 weeks. Welders and small-batch metal fabricators order an 18×36 steel building as their.
Starting from your selected configuration$11,400$13,000Save $1,600
or as low as $238/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You’ll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request, no surprises, no hidden fees.
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-18X36-FABRICATION-WELDBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
★
4.8/5
customer rating
⏱
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We’ve provided builds for
SPATIAL LAYOUT
See how 800 sq ft fits your 18×36 fabrication & welding shop.
18 feet wide × 36 feet long. Our 18×36 fabrication & welding shop fits 18-foot widths and 36-foot lengths to give you a code-passing shell delivered in 4–6 weeks.
Fabrication & Welding Shop layout.
Our 18×36 fabrication & welding shop fits 18-foot widths and 36-foot lengths to give you a code-passing shell delivered in 4–6 weeks. Welders and small-batch metal fabricators order an 18×36 steel building as their first commercial bay. 648 sq ft holds a welding table, a vertical metal storage rack, a grinder and chop-saw station, and a finishing area for paint and powder prep. Spec a 100-amp subpanel with National Electrical Code (NEC) rough-in framing, ventilation cutouts for fume extraction, and a 12-gauge frame to hang an overhead jib or hoist.
💡 Pro tip:Fabrication & Welding Shop works well at 18×36, add insulation + electrical for year-round use.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER
Build your 18×36 Fabrication & Welding Shop in 3D.
Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer, drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.
Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim, mix & match
Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
Auto-syncs to quote, what you build is what we price
All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.
🏗️
648 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 18×36 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
Fabrication & Welding Shop spec sheet.
Width18′
Length36′ + 6" overhang
Side height9′ standard
Floor space648 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES
How real buyers use Fabrication & Welding Shop.
DAILY USE
Everyday fabrication & welding shop
648 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a fabrication & welding shop.
STORAGE OVERFLOW
fabrication & welding shop + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOM
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.
FULL PRODUCT DETAILS
18×36 Fabrication & Welding Shop, what makes it different.
648sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$238/mo
From RTO
🏗️
Engineered for your county
Every 18×36 fabrication & welding shop is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.
Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩
Construction details
The same materials commercial fabricators use, not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.
Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚
Free delivery & install, really free
Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.
$0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
3–5 week lead time on regional routes
All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️
Warranty & lifespan
Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.
20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳
$0-down financing
Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all, fastest path to a closed deal.
RTO: $238/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders
⚡
Why 18×36?
648 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial, fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.
18′ × 36′ footprint with 648 sq ft interior
Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
Resale ROI $5,184–$7,776 added home value
PEOPLE ALSO ASK
Common questions from Fabrication & Welding Shop shoppers.
The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.
How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 18×36 metal building?
Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.
Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?
Yes, free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.
What’s the typical lead time for a 18×36 building?
Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.
Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?
Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month’s payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.
What’s covered under the 20-year warranty?
Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.
CUSTOMER REVIEWS
What real 18×36 Fabrication & Welding Shop buyers say.
⭐
No reviews yet for the 18×36 Fabrication & Welding Shop
Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.
How much does a 18×36 fabrication & welding shop cost?
A 18×36 fabrication & welding shop from Steel and Stud starts at $11,400 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $238/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.
Is delivery and installation included in the 18×36 fabrication & welding shop price?
Yes, every Steel and Stud fabrication & welding shop ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.
Do I need a permit for a 18×36 fabrication & welding shop?
Almost always for 648+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.
How is a Steel and Stud fabrication & welding shop different from a wood-frame build?
Steel solves the problems wood creates, no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.
What foundation does a 18×36 fabrication & welding shop need?
A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don’t already have a slab.
How fast can I get a 18×36 fabrication & welding shop delivered?
Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available, call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.
Can I finance a 18×36 fabrication & welding shop without a credit check?
Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month’s payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $238/month on a 18×36 fabrication & welding shop.
What warranty comes with the 18×36 fabrication & welding shop?
Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.
Can I customize the 18×36 fabrication & welding shop in 3D before I order?
Yes, our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.
Does the 18×36 fabrication & welding shop meet IBC commercial code?
Yes. Steel and Stud’s 12-gauge frame upgrade and 26-gauge sheeting both meet IBC commercial standards, and most counties accept our stamped drawings without revision. Engineered loads ship with the order, typical certified specs are 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow.
Ready to build?
Your Fabrication & Welding Shop quote takes one minute.
Tell us your zip and the options you want. We’ll send back a same-day, all-in price.
648 sq ft for compact garage, RV cover, or carport
18′ x 36′14 GaugeLocal Certification Available
Pre-engineered 18×36 steel building delivers 648 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
Leg height adjustable up to 20'
$11,400.00
Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
648 sq ft for compact garage, RV cover, or carport
18′ x 36′14 GaugeLocal Certification Available
Pre-engineered 18×36 steel building delivers 648 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
18×36 Equipment Lean-To Shed | Steel and Stud, From $10,200
18×36 Equipment Lean-To Shed, built for farm and ranch demands.
Our 18×36 equipment lean-to shed fits 18-foot widths and 36-foot lengths to give you durable cover that handles snow, wind, and feed loads. Hobby farmers use the open or partially enclosed 18×36 as a lean-to-style.
Starting from your selected configuration$10,200$11,650Save $1,450
or as low as $213/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You’ll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request, no surprises, no hidden fees.
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-18X36-EQUIPMENT-LEAN-TBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
★
4.8/5
customer rating
⏱
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We’ve provided builds for
SPATIAL LAYOUT
See how 800 sq ft fits your 18×36 equipment lean-to shed.
18 feet wide × 36 feet long. Our 18×36 equipment lean-to shed fits 18-foot widths and 36-foot lengths to give you durable cover that handles snow, wind, and feed loads.
Equipment Lean-To Shed layout.
Our 18×36 equipment lean-to shed fits 18-foot widths and 36-foot lengths to give you durable cover that handles snow, wind, and feed loads. Hobby farmers use the open or partially enclosed 18×36 as a lean-to-style equipment shed for a sub-compact tractor, a zero-turn mower, brush hog, and a UTV. 12-foot legs clear a ROPS bar with the cage up. The 35-foot run lines all four pieces of equipment up side-by-side under cover.
💡 Pro tip:Equipment Lean-To Shed works well at 18×36, add insulation + electrical for year-round use.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER
Build your 18×36 Equipment Lean-To Shed in 3D.
Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer, drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.
Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim, mix & match
Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
Auto-syncs to quote, what you build is what we price
All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.
🏗️
648 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 18×36 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
Equipment Lean-To Shed spec sheet.
Width18′
Length36′ + 6" overhang
Side height9′ standard
Floor space648 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES
How real buyers use Equipment Lean-To Shed.
DAILY USE
Everyday equipment lean-to shed
648 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a equipment lean-to shed.
STORAGE OVERFLOW
equipment lean-to shed + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOM
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.
FULL PRODUCT DETAILS
18×36 Equipment Lean-To Shed, what makes it different.
648sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$213/mo
From RTO
🏗️
Engineered for your county
Every 18×36 equipment lean-to shed is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.
Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩
Construction details
The same materials commercial fabricators use, not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.
Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚
Free delivery & install, really free
Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.
$0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
3–5 week lead time on regional routes
All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️
Warranty & lifespan
Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.
20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳
$0-down financing
Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all, fastest path to a closed deal.
RTO: $213/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders
⚡
Why 18×36?
648 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial, fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.
18′ × 36′ footprint with 648 sq ft interior
Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
Resale ROI $5,184–$7,776 added home value
PEOPLE ALSO ASK
Common questions from Equipment Lean-To Shed shoppers.
The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.
How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 18×36 metal building?
Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.
Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?
Yes, free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.
What’s the typical lead time for a 18×36 building?
Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.
Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?
Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month’s payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.
What’s covered under the 20-year warranty?
Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.
CUSTOMER REVIEWS
What real 18×36 Equipment Lean-To Shed buyers say.
⭐
No reviews yet for the 18×36 Equipment Lean-To Shed
Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.
How much does a 18×36 equipment lean-to shed cost?
A 18×36 equipment lean-to shed from Steel and Stud starts at $10,200 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $213/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.
Is delivery and installation included in the 18×36 equipment lean-to shed price?
Yes, every Steel and Stud equipment lean-to shed ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.
Do I need a permit for a 18×36 equipment lean-to shed?
Almost always for 648+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.
How is a Steel and Stud equipment lean-to shed different from a wood-frame build?
Steel solves the problems wood creates, no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.
What foundation does a 18×36 equipment lean-to shed need?
A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don’t already have a slab.
How fast can I get a 18×36 equipment lean-to shed delivered?
Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available, call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.
Can I finance a 18×36 equipment lean-to shed without a credit check?
Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month’s payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $213/month on a 18×36 equipment lean-to shed.
What warranty comes with the 18×36 equipment lean-to shed?
Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.
Can I customize the 18×36 equipment lean-to shed in 3D before I order?
Yes, our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.
Will the 18×36 equipment lean-to shed stand up to livestock and Midwest weather?
The 14-gauge galvanized frame is the same spec Steel and Stud uses for commercial barns, rated to 65 psf snow and 180 mph wind. Ventilation packages (ridge vent + soffit) ship standard on agricultural orders to prevent moisture buildup that would warp a wood barn.
Ready to build?
Your Equipment Lean-To Shed quote takes one minute.
Tell us your zip and the options you want. We’ll send back a same-day, all-in price.
648 sq ft for compact garage, RV cover, or carport
18′ x 36′14 GaugeLocal Certification Available
Pre-engineered 18×36 steel building delivers 648 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
Leg height adjustable up to 20'
$10,200.00
Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
648 sq ft for compact garage, RV cover, or carport
18′ x 36′14 GaugeLocal Certification Available
Pre-engineered 18×36 steel building delivers 648 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
18×36 Boat and Toy Storage | Steel and Stud, From $9,550
18×36 Boat and Toy Storage, built for hobby and recreational use.
18×36 delivers 648 sq ft of hobby-ready boat and toy storage space. RV owners and boat owners pick the 18×36 enclosed metal building to keep a 24-foot center console with trailer plus jet skis, kayaks, and outboard gear.
You’re viewing:Boat and Toy Storage·Size18×36·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$9,550$10,900Save $1,350
or as low as $199/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You’ll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request, no surprises, no hidden fees.
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-18X36-BOAT-TOY-STORAGEBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
★
4.8/5
customer rating
⏱
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We’ve provided builds for
SPATIAL LAYOUT
See how 800 sq ft fits your 18×36 boat and toy storage.
18 feet wide × 36 feet long. 18×36 delivers 648 sq ft of hobby-ready boat and toy storage space.
Boat and Toy Storage layout.
18×36 delivers 648 sq ft of hobby-ready boat and toy storage space. RV owners and boat owners pick the 18×36 enclosed metal building to keep a 24-foot center console with trailer plus jet skis, kayaks, and outboard gear out of the weather. A 18×36 roll-up door clears a tower-equipped bowrider. Insulated walls protect electronics through winter.
💡 Pro tip:Boat and Toy Storage works well at 18×36, add insulation + electrical for year-round use.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER
Build your 18×36 Boat and Toy Storage in 3D.
Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer, drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.
Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim, mix & match
Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
Auto-syncs to quote, what you build is what we price
All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.
🏗️
648 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 18×36 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
Boat and Toy Storage spec sheet.
Width18′
Length36′ + 6" overhang
Side height9′ standard
Floor space648 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES
How real buyers use Boat and Toy Storage.
DAILY USE
Everyday boat and toy storage
648 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a boat and toy storage.
STORAGE OVERFLOW
boat and toy storage + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOM
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.
FULL PRODUCT DETAILS
18×36 Boat and Toy Storage, what makes it different.
648sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$199/mo
From RTO
🏗️
Engineered for your county
Every 18×36 boat and toy storage is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.
Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩
Construction details
The same materials commercial fabricators use, not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.
Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚
Free delivery & install, really free
Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.
$0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
3–5 week lead time on regional routes
All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️
Warranty & lifespan
Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.
20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳
$0-down financing
Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all, fastest path to a closed deal.
RTO: $199/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders
⚡
Why 18×36?
648 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial, fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.
18′ × 36′ footprint with 648 sq ft interior
Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
Resale ROI $5,184–$7,776 added home value
PEOPLE ALSO ASK
Common questions from Boat and Toy Storage shoppers.
The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.
How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 18×36 metal building?
Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.
Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?
Yes, free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.
What’s the typical lead time for a 18×36 building?
Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.
Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?
Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month’s payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.
What’s covered under the 20-year warranty?
Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.
CUSTOMER REVIEWS
What real 18×36 Boat and Toy Storage buyers say.
⭐
No reviews yet for the 18×36 Boat and Toy Storage
Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.
A 18×36 boat and toy storage from Steel and Stud starts at $9,550 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $199/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.
Is delivery and installation included in the 18×36 boat and toy storage price?
Yes, every Steel and Stud boat and toy storage ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.
Do I need a permit for a 18×36 boat and toy storage?
Almost always for 648+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.
How is a Steel and Stud boat and toy storage different from a wood-frame build?
Steel solves the problems wood creates, no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.
What foundation does a 18×36 boat and toy storage need?
A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don’t already have a slab.
How fast can I get a 18×36 boat and toy storage delivered?
Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available, call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.
Can I finance a 18×36 boat and toy storage without a credit check?
Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month’s payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $199/month on a 18×36 boat and toy storage.
What warranty comes with the 18×36 boat and toy storage?
Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.
Can I customize the 18×36 boat and toy storage in 3D before I order?
Yes, our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.
Can I insulate the 18×36 boat and toy storage for year-round use?
Yes, Steel and Stud offers R-13 wall + R-19 ceiling insulation packages, and the interior is drywall-ready. Most owners finish a boat and toy storage to a livable retreat in 2–3 weekends. Add a mini-split HVAC at checkout for full four-season comfort.
Ready to build?
Your Boat and Toy Storage quote takes one minute.
Tell us your zip and the options you want. We’ll send back a same-day, all-in price.
648 sq ft for compact garage, RV cover, or carport
18′ x 36′14 GaugeLocal Certification Available
Pre-engineered 18×36 steel building delivers 648 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
Leg height adjustable up to 20'
$9,550.00
Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
720 sq ft for compact garage, RV cover, or carport
18′ x 40′14 GaugeLocal Certification Available
Pre-engineered 18×40 steel building delivers 720 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
18×40 One Car Garage with Workshop | Steel and Stud, From $10,650
18×40 One Car Garage with Workshop, built for daily backyard use.
Looking for a 18×40 one car garage with workshop? At 720 sq ft, this footprint suits homeowners adding garage, workshop, or hobby space. Homeowners use this depth to park one full-size truck up front and dedicate the.
You’re viewing:One Car Garage with Workshop·Size18×40·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$10,650$12,150Save $1,500
or as low as $222/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You’ll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request, no surprises, no hidden fees.
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-18X40-ONE-CAR-GARAGE-WBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
★
4.8/5
customer rating
⏱
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We’ve provided builds for
SPATIAL LAYOUT
See how 800 sq ft fits your 18×40 one car garage with workshop.
18 feet wide × 40 feet long. Looking for a 18×40 one car garage with workshop? At 720 sq ft, this footprint suits homeowners adding garage, workshop, or hobby space.
One Car Garage with Workshop layout.
Looking for a 18×40 one car garage with workshop? At 720 sq ft, this footprint suits homeowners adding garage, workshop, or hobby space. Homeowners use this depth to park one full-size truck up front and dedicate the back 20 feet to a workbench, tool wall, and standing toolbox. The 16-foot width gives you 3-4 feet of side clearance beside an F-150, enough to walk past with a project in hand.
💡 Pro tip:One Car Garage with Workshop works well at 18×40, add insulation + electrical for year-round use.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER
Build your 18×40 One Car Garage with Workshop in 3D.
Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer, drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.
Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim, mix & match
Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
Auto-syncs to quote, what you build is what we price
All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.
🏗️
720 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 18×40 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
One Car Garage with Workshop spec sheet.
Width18′
Length40′ + 6" overhang
Side height9′ standard
Floor space720 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES
How real buyers use One Car Garage with Workshop.
DAILY USE
Everyday one car garage with workshop
720 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a one car garage with workshop.
STORAGE OVERFLOW
one car garage with workshop + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOM
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.
FULL PRODUCT DETAILS
18×40 One Car Garage with Workshop, what makes it different.
720sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$222/mo
From RTO
🏗️
Engineered for your county
Every 18×40 one car garage with workshop is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.
Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩
Construction details
The same materials commercial fabricators use, not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.
Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚
Free delivery & install, really free
Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.
$0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
3–5 week lead time on regional routes
All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️
Warranty & lifespan
Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.
20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳
$0-down financing
Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all, fastest path to a closed deal.
RTO: $222/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders
⚡
Why 18×40?
720 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial, fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.
18′ × 40′ footprint with 720 sq ft interior
Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
Resale ROI $5,760–$8,640 added home value
PEOPLE ALSO ASK
Common questions from One Car Garage with Workshop shoppers.
The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.
How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 18×40 metal building?
Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.
Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?
Yes, free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.
What’s the typical lead time for a 18×40 building?
Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.
Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?
Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month’s payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.
What’s covered under the 20-year warranty?
Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.
CUSTOMER REVIEWS
What real 18×40 One Car Garage with Workshop buyers say.
⭐
No reviews yet for the 18×40 One Car Garage with Workshop
Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.
How much does a 18×40 one car garage with workshop cost?
A 18×40 one car garage with workshop from Steel and Stud starts at $10,650 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $222/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.
Is delivery and installation included in the 18×40 one car garage with workshop price?
Yes, every Steel and Stud one car garage with workshop ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.
Do I need a permit for a 18×40 one car garage with workshop?
Almost always for 720+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.
How is a Steel and Stud one car garage with workshop different from a wood-frame build?
Steel solves the problems wood creates, no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.
What foundation does a 18×40 one car garage with workshop need?
A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don’t already have a slab.
How fast can I get a 18×40 one car garage with workshop delivered?
Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available, call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.
Can I finance a 18×40 one car garage with workshop without a credit check?
Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month’s payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $222/month on a 18×40 one car garage with workshop.
What warranty comes with the 18×40 one car garage with workshop?
Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.
Can I customize the 18×40 one car garage with workshop in 3D before I order?
Yes, our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.
Does a 18×40 one car garage with workshop add resale value to my home?
An enclosed 18×40 one car garage with workshop typically adds $5,760–$8,640 in resale value per regional comp data, and most insurance carriers reduce premiums for indoor vehicle / equipment storage. Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust warranty transfers to the next owner.
Ready to build?
Your One Car Garage with Workshop quote takes one minute.
Tell us your zip and the options you want. We’ll send back a same-day, all-in price.
720 sq ft for compact garage, RV cover, or carport
18′ x 40′14 GaugeLocal Certification Available
Pre-engineered 18×40 steel building delivers 720 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
Leg height adjustable up to 20'
$10,650.00
Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
720 sq ft for compact garage, RV cover, or carport
18′ x 40′14 GaugeLocal Certification Available
Pre-engineered 18×40 steel building delivers 720 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
18×40 Metal Workshop | Steel and Stud, From $10,650
18×40 Metal Workshop, built for daily backyard use.
Looking for a 18×40 metal workshop? At 720 sq ft, this footprint suits homeowners adding garage, workshop, or hobby space. Fits a table saw, drill press, miter station, and lumber rack with aisle clearance. Add R-19.
Starting from your selected configuration$10,650$12,150Save $1,500
or as low as $222/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You’ll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request, no surprises, no hidden fees.
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-18X40-METAL-WORKSHOPBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
★
4.8/5
customer rating
⏱
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We’ve provided builds for
SPATIAL LAYOUT
See how 800 sq ft fits your 18×40 metal workshop.
18 feet wide × 40 feet long. Looking for a 18×40 metal workshop? At 720 sq ft, this footprint suits homeowners adding garage, workshop, or hobby space.
Metal Workshop layout.
Looking for a 18×40 metal workshop? At 720 sq ft, this footprint suits homeowners adding garage, workshop, or hobby space. Fits a table saw, drill press, miter station, and lumber rack with aisle clearance. Add R-19 insulation and you’ve got a year-round conditioned shop.
💡 Pro tip:Metal Workshop works well at 18×40, add insulation + electrical for year-round use.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER
Build your 18×40 Metal Workshop in 3D.
Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer, drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.
Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim, mix & match
Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
Auto-syncs to quote, what you build is what we price
All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.
🏗️
720 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 18×40 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
Metal Workshop spec sheet.
Width18′
Length40′ + 6" overhang
Side height9′ standard
Floor space720 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES
How real buyers use Metal Workshop.
DAILY USE
Everyday metal workshop
720 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a metal workshop.
STORAGE OVERFLOW
metal workshop + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOM
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.
FULL PRODUCT DETAILS
18×40 Metal Workshop, what makes it different.
720sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$222/mo
From RTO
🏗️
Engineered for your county
Every 18×40 metal workshop is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.
Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩
Construction details
The same materials commercial fabricators use, not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.
Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚
Free delivery & install, really free
Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.
$0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
3–5 week lead time on regional routes
All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️
Warranty & lifespan
Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.
20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳
$0-down financing
Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all, fastest path to a closed deal.
RTO: $222/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders
⚡
Why 18×40?
720 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial, fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.
18′ × 40′ footprint with 720 sq ft interior
Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
Resale ROI $5,760–$8,640 added home value
PEOPLE ALSO ASK
Common questions from Metal Workshop shoppers.
The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.
How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 18×40 metal building?
Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.
Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?
Yes, free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.
What’s the typical lead time for a 18×40 building?
Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.
Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?
Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month’s payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.
What’s covered under the 20-year warranty?
Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.
CUSTOMER REVIEWS
What real 18×40 Metal Workshop buyers say.
⭐
No reviews yet for the 18×40 Metal Workshop
Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.
A 18×40 metal workshop from Steel and Stud starts at $10,650 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $222/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.
Is delivery and installation included in the 18×40 metal workshop price?
Yes, every Steel and Stud metal workshop ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.
Do I need a permit for a 18×40 metal workshop?
Almost always for 720+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.
How is a Steel and Stud metal workshop different from a wood-frame build?
Steel solves the problems wood creates, no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.
What foundation does a 18×40 metal workshop need?
A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don’t already have a slab.
How fast can I get a 18×40 metal workshop delivered?
Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available, call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.
Can I finance a 18×40 metal workshop without a credit check?
Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month’s payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $222/month on a 18×40 metal workshop.
What warranty comes with the 18×40 metal workshop?
Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.
Can I customize the 18×40 metal workshop in 3D before I order?
Yes, our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.
Does a 18×40 metal workshop add resale value to my home?
An enclosed 18×40 metal workshop typically adds $5,760–$8,640 in resale value per regional comp data, and most insurance carriers reduce premiums for indoor vehicle / equipment storage. Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust warranty transfers to the next owner.
Ready to build?
Your Metal Workshop quote takes one minute.
Tell us your zip and the options you want. We’ll send back a same-day, all-in price.
720 sq ft for compact garage, RV cover, or carport
18′ x 40′14 GaugeLocal Certification Available
Pre-engineered 18×40 steel building delivers 720 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
Leg height adjustable up to 20'
$10,650.00
Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
720 sq ft for compact garage, RV cover, or carport
18′ x 40′14 GaugeLocal Certification Available
Pre-engineered 18×40 steel building delivers 720 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
18×40 Metal Carport | Steel and Stud, From $10,650
18×40 Metal Carport, built for hobby and recreational use.
Built for recreational use without site-build cost, this 18×40 metal carport packs 720 sq ft into a code-compliant shell. Open-sided 18×40 metal carports cover two vehicles parked end-to-end or a single travel trailer.
You’re viewing:Metal Carport·Size18×40·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$10,650$12,150Save $1,500
or as low as $222/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You’ll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request, no surprises, no hidden fees.
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-18X40-METAL-CARPORTBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
★
4.8/5
customer rating
⏱
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We’ve provided builds for
SPATIAL LAYOUT
See how 800 sq ft fits your 18×40 metal carport.
18 feet wide × 40 feet long. Built for recreational use without site-build cost, this 18×40 metal carport packs 720 sq ft into a code-compliant shell.
Metal Carport layout.
Built for recreational use without site-build cost, this 18×40 metal carport packs 720 sq ft into a code-compliant shell. Open-sided 18×40 metal carports cover two vehicles parked end-to-end or a single travel trailer up to 36 feet. RV owners size up to 12-foot legs to clear a Class C roof with AC unit. Ground-anchored, no slab required for most counties.
💡 Pro tip:Metal Carport works well at 18×40, add insulation + electrical for year-round use.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER
Build your 18×40 Metal Carport in 3D.
Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer, drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.
Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim, mix & match
Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
Auto-syncs to quote, what you build is what we price
All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.
🏗️
720 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 18×40 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
Metal Carport spec sheet.
Width18′
Length40′ + 6" overhang
Side height9′ standard
Floor space720 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES
How real buyers use Metal Carport.
DAILY USE
Everyday metal carport
720 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a metal carport.
STORAGE OVERFLOW
metal carport + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOM
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.
FULL PRODUCT DETAILS
18×40 Metal Carport, what makes it different.
720sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$222/mo
From RTO
🏗️
Engineered for your county
Every 18×40 metal carport is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.
Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩
Construction details
The same materials commercial fabricators use, not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.
Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚
Free delivery & install, really free
Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.
$0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
3–5 week lead time on regional routes
All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️
Warranty & lifespan
Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.
20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳
$0-down financing
Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all, fastest path to a closed deal.
RTO: $222/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders
⚡
Why 18×40?
720 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial, fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.
18′ × 40′ footprint with 720 sq ft interior
Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
Resale ROI $5,760–$8,640 added home value
PEOPLE ALSO ASK
Common questions from Metal Carport shoppers.
The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.
How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 18×40 metal building?
Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.
Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?
Yes, free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.
What’s the typical lead time for a 18×40 building?
Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.
Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?
Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month’s payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.
What’s covered under the 20-year warranty?
Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.
CUSTOMER REVIEWS
What real 18×40 Metal Carport buyers say.
⭐
No reviews yet for the 18×40 Metal Carport
Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.
A 18×40 metal carport from Steel and Stud starts at $10,650 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $222/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.
Is delivery and installation included in the 18×40 metal carport price?
Yes, every Steel and Stud metal carport ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.
Do I need a permit for a 18×40 metal carport?
Almost always for 720+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.
How is a Steel and Stud metal carport different from a wood-frame build?
Steel solves the problems wood creates, no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.
What foundation does a 18×40 metal carport need?
A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don’t already have a slab.
How fast can I get a 18×40 metal carport delivered?
Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available, call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.
Can I finance a 18×40 metal carport without a credit check?
Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month’s payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $222/month on a 18×40 metal carport.
What warranty comes with the 18×40 metal carport?
Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.
Can I customize the 18×40 metal carport in 3D before I order?
Yes, our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.
Can I insulate the 18×40 metal carport for year-round use?
Yes, Steel and Stud offers R-13 wall + R-19 ceiling insulation packages, and the interior is drywall-ready. Most owners finish a metal carport to a livable retreat in 2–3 weekends. Add a mini-split HVAC at checkout for full four-season comfort.
Ready to build?
Your Metal Carport quote takes one minute.
Tell us your zip and the options you want. We’ll send back a same-day, all-in price.
720 sq ft for compact garage, RV cover, or carport
18′ x 40′14 GaugeLocal Certification Available
Pre-engineered 18×40 steel building delivers 720 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
Leg height adjustable up to 20'
$10,650.00
Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
720 sq ft for compact garage, RV cover, or carport
18′ x 40′14 GaugeLocal Certification Available
Pre-engineered 18×40 steel building delivers 720 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
18×40 RV Cover with Storage | Steel and Stud, From $10,650
18×40 RV Cover with Storage, built for hobby and recreational use.
Looking for a 18×40 rv cover with storage? At 720 sq ft, this footprint suits home gyms, hunting cabins, or backyard retreats. RV owners who want enclosure on three sides spec a 18×40 with one open end for drive-through.
You’re viewing:RV Cover with Storage·Size18×40·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$10,650$12,150Save $1,500
or as low as $222/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You’ll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request, no surprises, no hidden fees.
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-18X40-RV-COVER-STORAGEBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
★
4.8/5
customer rating
⏱
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We’ve provided builds for
SPATIAL LAYOUT
See how 800 sq ft fits your 18×40 rv cover with storage.
18 feet wide × 40 feet long. Looking for a 18×40 rv cover with storage? At 720 sq ft, this footprint suits home gyms, hunting cabins, or backyard retreats.
RV Cover with Storage layout.
Looking for a 18×40 rv cover with storage? At 720 sq ft, this footprint suits home gyms, hunting cabins, or backyard retreats. RV owners who want enclosure on three sides spec a 18×40 with one open end for drive-through access. The 14-foot leg clears a fifth-wheel, and the back end becomes locked storage for batteries, hoses, and chocks. Wind-rated to 140 MPH for coastal storage.
💡 Pro tip:RV Cover with Storage works well at 18×40, add insulation + electrical for year-round use.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER
Build your 18×40 RV Cover with Storage in 3D.
Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer, drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.
Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim, mix & match
Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
Auto-syncs to quote, what you build is what we price
All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.
🏗️
720 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 18×40 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
RV Cover with Storage spec sheet.
Width18′
Length40′ + 6" overhang
Side height9′ standard
Floor space720 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES
How real buyers use RV Cover with Storage.
DAILY USE
Everyday rv cover with storage
720 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a rv cover with storage.
STORAGE OVERFLOW
rv cover with storage + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOM
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.
FULL PRODUCT DETAILS
18×40 RV Cover with Storage, what makes it different.
720sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$222/mo
From RTO
🏗️
Engineered for your county
Every 18×40 rv cover with storage is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.
Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩
Construction details
The same materials commercial fabricators use, not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.
Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚
Free delivery & install, really free
Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.
$0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
3–5 week lead time on regional routes
All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️
Warranty & lifespan
Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.
20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳
$0-down financing
Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all, fastest path to a closed deal.
RTO: $222/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders
⚡
Why 18×40?
720 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial, fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.
18′ × 40′ footprint with 720 sq ft interior
Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
Resale ROI $5,760–$8,640 added home value
PEOPLE ALSO ASK
Common questions from RV Cover with Storage shoppers.
The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.
How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 18×40 metal building?
Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.
Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?
Yes, free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.
What’s the typical lead time for a 18×40 building?
Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.
Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?
Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month’s payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.
What’s covered under the 20-year warranty?
Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.
CUSTOMER REVIEWS
What real 18×40 RV Cover with Storage buyers say.
⭐
No reviews yet for the 18×40 RV Cover with Storage
Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.
A 18×40 rv cover with storage from Steel and Stud starts at $10,650 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $222/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.
Is delivery and installation included in the 18×40 rv cover with storage price?
Yes, every Steel and Stud rv cover with storage ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.
Do I need a permit for a 18×40 rv cover with storage?
Almost always for 720+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.
How is a Steel and Stud rv cover with storage different from a wood-frame build?
Steel solves the problems wood creates, no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.
What foundation does a 18×40 rv cover with storage need?
A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don’t already have a slab.
How fast can I get a 18×40 rv cover with storage delivered?
Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available, call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.
Can I finance a 18×40 rv cover with storage without a credit check?
Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month’s payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $222/month on a 18×40 rv cover with storage.
What warranty comes with the 18×40 rv cover with storage?
Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.
Can I customize the 18×40 rv cover with storage in 3D before I order?
Yes, our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.
Can I insulate the 18×40 rv cover with storage for year-round use?
Yes, Steel and Stud offers R-13 wall + R-19 ceiling insulation packages, and the interior is drywall-ready. Most owners finish a rv cover with storage to a livable retreat in 2–3 weekends. Add a mini-split HVAC at checkout for full four-season comfort.
Ready to build?
Your RV Cover with Storage quote takes one minute.
Tell us your zip and the options you want. We’ll send back a same-day, all-in price.
720 sq ft for compact garage, RV cover, or carport
18′ x 40′14 GaugeLocal Certification Available
Pre-engineered 18×40 steel building delivers 720 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
Leg height adjustable up to 20'
$10,650.00
Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
720 sq ft for compact garage, RV cover, or carport
18′ x 40′14 GaugeLocal Certification Available
Pre-engineered 18×40 steel building delivers 720 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
18×40 Horse Tack & Feed Barn | Steel and Stud, From $11,300
18×40 Horse Tack & Feed Barn, built for farm and ranch demands.
Our 18×40 horse tack & feed barn fits 18-foot widths and 40-foot lengths to give you durable cover that handles snow, wind, and feed loads. Hobby farmers run a 18×40 as a two-stall barn plus a tack/feed room: 18×40.
Starting from your selected configuration$11,300$12,900Save $1,600
or as low as $235/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You’ll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request, no surprises, no hidden fees.
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-18X40-HORSE-TACK-FEED-Built:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
★
4.8/5
customer rating
⏱
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We’ve provided builds for
SPATIAL LAYOUT
See how 800 sq ft fits your 18×40 horse tack & feed barn.
18 feet wide × 40 feet long. Our 18×40 horse tack & feed barn fits 18-foot widths and 40-foot lengths to give you durable cover that handles snow, wind, and feed loads.
Horse Tack & Feed Barn layout.
Our 18×40 horse tack & feed barn fits 18-foot widths and 40-foot lengths to give you durable cover that handles snow, wind, and feed loads. Hobby farmers run a 18×40 as a two-stall barn plus a tack/feed room: 18×40 stalls on one end, 18×40 storage on the other, breezeway in the middle. Sliding barn doors on both gable ends, walk-in to the tack room. Galvanized framing handles ammonia exposure.
💡 Pro tip:Horse Tack & Feed Barn works well at 18×40, add insulation + electrical for year-round use.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER
Build your 18×40 Horse Tack & Feed Barn in 3D.
Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer, drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.
Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim, mix & match
Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
Auto-syncs to quote, what you build is what we price
All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.
🏗️
720 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 18×40 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
Horse Tack & Feed Barn spec sheet.
Width18′
Length40′ + 6" overhang
Side height9′ standard
Floor space720 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES
How real buyers use Horse Tack & Feed Barn.
DAILY USE
Everyday horse tack & feed barn
720 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a horse tack & feed barn.
STORAGE OVERFLOW
horse tack & feed barn + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOM
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.
FULL PRODUCT DETAILS
18×40 Horse Tack & Feed Barn, what makes it different.
720sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$235/mo
From RTO
🏗️
Engineered for your county
Every 18×40 horse tack & feed barn is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.
Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩
Construction details
The same materials commercial fabricators use, not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.
Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚
Free delivery & install, really free
Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.
$0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
3–5 week lead time on regional routes
All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️
Warranty & lifespan
Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.
20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳
$0-down financing
Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all, fastest path to a closed deal.
RTO: $235/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders
⚡
Why 18×40?
720 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial, fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.
18′ × 40′ footprint with 720 sq ft interior
Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
Resale ROI $5,760–$8,640 added home value
PEOPLE ALSO ASK
Common questions from Horse Tack & Feed Barn shoppers.
The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.
How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 18×40 metal building?
Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.
Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?
Yes, free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.
What’s the typical lead time for a 18×40 building?
Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.
Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?
Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month’s payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.
What’s covered under the 20-year warranty?
Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.
CUSTOMER REVIEWS
What real 18×40 Horse Tack & Feed Barn buyers say.
⭐
No reviews yet for the 18×40 Horse Tack & Feed Barn
Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.
How much does a 18×40 horse tack & feed barn cost?
A 18×40 horse tack & feed barn from Steel and Stud starts at $11,300 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $235/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.
Is delivery and installation included in the 18×40 horse tack & feed barn price?
Yes, every Steel and Stud horse tack & feed barn ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.
Do I need a permit for a 18×40 horse tack & feed barn?
Almost always for 720+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.
How is a Steel and Stud horse tack & feed barn different from a wood-frame build?
Steel solves the problems wood creates, no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.
What foundation does a 18×40 horse tack & feed barn need?
A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don’t already have a slab.
How fast can I get a 18×40 horse tack & feed barn delivered?
Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available, call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.
Can I finance a 18×40 horse tack & feed barn without a credit check?
Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month’s payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $235/month on a 18×40 horse tack & feed barn.
What warranty comes with the 18×40 horse tack & feed barn?
Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.
Can I customize the 18×40 horse tack & feed barn in 3D before I order?
Yes, our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.
Will the 18×40 horse tack & feed barn stand up to livestock and Midwest weather?
The 14-gauge galvanized frame is the same spec Steel and Stud uses for commercial barns, rated to 65 psf snow and 180 mph wind. Ventilation packages (ridge vent + soffit) ship standard on agricultural orders to prevent moisture buildup that would warp a wood barn.
Ready to build?
Your Horse Tack & Feed Barn quote takes one minute.
Tell us your zip and the options you want. We’ll send back a same-day, all-in price.
720 sq ft for compact garage, RV cover, or carport
18′ x 40′14 GaugeLocal Certification Available
Pre-engineered 18×40 steel building delivers 720 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
Leg height adjustable up to 20'
$11,300.00
Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
720 sq ft for compact garage, RV cover, or carport
18′ x 40′14 GaugeLocal Certification Available
Pre-engineered 18×40 steel building delivers 720 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
18×40 Equipment & Implement Storage | Steel and Stud, From $11,300
18×40 Equipment & Implement Storage, built for farm and ranch demands.
Built for farm and ranch operations, this 18×40 equipment & implement storage packs 720 sq ft into a code-compliant shell. Rural property owners store a compact tractor, brush hog, disc, and round baler under one 18×40.
Starting from your selected configuration$11,300$12,900Save $1,600
or as low as $235/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You’ll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request, no surprises, no hidden fees.
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-18X40-EQUIPMENT-IMPLEMBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
★
4.8/5
customer rating
⏱
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We’ve provided builds for
SPATIAL LAYOUT
See how 800 sq ft fits your 18×40 equipment & implement storage.
18 feet wide × 40 feet long. Built for farm and ranch operations, this 18×40 equipment & implement storage packs 720 sq ft into a code-compliant shell.
Equipment & Implement Storage layout.
Built for farm and ranch operations, this 18×40 equipment & implement storage packs 720 sq ft into a code-compliant shell. Rural property owners store a compact tractor, brush hog, disc, and round baler under one 18×40 roof. The 14-foot legs clear a tractor with a loader raised, and the 40-foot length lines up implements without unhooking. Open one end for drive-through.
💡 Pro tip:Equipment & Implement Storage works well at 18×40, add insulation + electrical for year-round use.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER
Build your 18×40 Equipment & Implement Storage in 3D.
Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer, drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.
Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim, mix & match
Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
Auto-syncs to quote, what you build is what we price
All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.
🏗️
720 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 18×40 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
Equipment & Implement Storage spec sheet.
Width18′
Length40′ + 6" overhang
Side height9′ standard
Floor space720 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES
How real buyers use Equipment & Implement Storage.
DAILY USE
Everyday equipment & implement storage
720 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a equipment & implement storage.
STORAGE OVERFLOW
equipment & implement storage + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOM
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.
FULL PRODUCT DETAILS
18×40 Equipment & Implement Storage, what makes it different.
720sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$235/mo
From RTO
🏗️
Engineered for your county
Every 18×40 equipment & implement storage is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.
Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩
Construction details
The same materials commercial fabricators use, not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.
Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚
Free delivery & install, really free
Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.
$0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
3–5 week lead time on regional routes
All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️
Warranty & lifespan
Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.
20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳
$0-down financing
Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all, fastest path to a closed deal.
RTO: $235/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders
⚡
Why 18×40?
720 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial, fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.
18′ × 40′ footprint with 720 sq ft interior
Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
Resale ROI $5,760–$8,640 added home value
PEOPLE ALSO ASK
Common questions from Equipment & Implement Storage shoppers.
The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.
How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 18×40 metal building?
Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.
Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?
Yes, free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.
What’s the typical lead time for a 18×40 building?
Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.
Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?
Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month’s payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.
What’s covered under the 20-year warranty?
Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.
CUSTOMER REVIEWS
What real 18×40 Equipment & Implement Storage buyers say.
⭐
No reviews yet for the 18×40 Equipment & Implement Storage
Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.
How much does a 18×40 equipment & implement storage cost?
A 18×40 equipment & implement storage from Steel and Stud starts at $11,300 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $235/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.
Is delivery and installation included in the 18×40 equipment & implement storage price?
Yes, every Steel and Stud equipment & implement storage ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.
Do I need a permit for a 18×40 equipment & implement storage?
Almost always for 720+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.
How is a Steel and Stud equipment & implement storage different from a wood-frame build?
Steel solves the problems wood creates, no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.
What foundation does a 18×40 equipment & implement storage need?
A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don’t already have a slab.
How fast can I get a 18×40 equipment & implement storage delivered?
Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available, call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.
Can I finance a 18×40 equipment & implement storage without a credit check?
Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month’s payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $235/month on a 18×40 equipment & implement storage.
What warranty comes with the 18×40 equipment & implement storage?
Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.
Can I customize the 18×40 equipment & implement storage in 3D before I order?
Yes, our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.
Will the 18×40 equipment & implement storage stand up to livestock and Midwest weather?
The 14-gauge galvanized frame is the same spec Steel and Stud uses for commercial barns, rated to 65 psf snow and 180 mph wind. Ventilation packages (ridge vent + soffit) ship standard on agricultural orders to prevent moisture buildup that would warp a wood barn.
Ready to build?
Your Equipment & Implement Storage quote takes one minute.
Tell us your zip and the options you want. We’ll send back a same-day, all-in price.
720 sq ft for compact garage, RV cover, or carport
18′ x 40′14 GaugeLocal Certification Available
Pre-engineered 18×40 steel building delivers 720 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
Leg height adjustable up to 20'
$11,300.00
Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
720 sq ft for compact garage, RV cover, or carport
18′ x 40′14 GaugeLocal Certification Available
Pre-engineered 18×40 steel building delivers 720 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
18×40 Detached Garage | Steel and Stud, From $10,650
18×40 Detached Garage, built for daily backyard use.
Our 18×40 detached garage fits 18-foot widths and 40-foot lengths to give you a finished daily-use building without contractor pricing. A 18×40 detached garage holds one car plus a small boat, two motorcycles plus a.
Starting from your selected configuration$10,650$12,150Save $1,500
or as low as $222/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You’ll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request, no surprises, no hidden fees.
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-18X40-DETACHED-GARAGEBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
★
4.8/5
customer rating
⏱
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We’ve provided builds for
SPATIAL LAYOUT
See how 800 sq ft fits your 18×40 detached garage.
18 feet wide × 40 feet long. Our 18×40 detached garage fits 18-foot widths and 40-foot lengths to give you a finished daily-use building without contractor pricing.
Detached Garage layout.
Our 18×40 detached garage fits 18-foot widths and 40-foot lengths to give you a finished daily-use building without contractor pricing. A 18×40 detached garage holds one car plus a small boat, two motorcycles plus a workbench, or a single bay with a 20-foot storage room behind a partition wall. Wainscoting and a Barn Red roof gives it residential curb appeal that satisfies most HOAs.
💡 Pro tip:Detached Garage works well at 18×40, add insulation + electrical for year-round use.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER
Build your 18×40 Detached Garage in 3D.
Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer, drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.
Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim, mix & match
Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
Auto-syncs to quote, what you build is what we price
All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.
🏗️
720 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 18×40 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
Detached Garage spec sheet.
Width18′
Length40′ + 6" overhang
Side height9′ standard
Floor space720 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES
How real buyers use Detached Garage.
DAILY USE
Everyday detached garage
720 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a detached garage.
STORAGE OVERFLOW
detached garage + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOM
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.
FULL PRODUCT DETAILS
18×40 Detached Garage, what makes it different.
720sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$222/mo
From RTO
🏗️
Engineered for your county
Every 18×40 detached garage is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.
Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩
Construction details
The same materials commercial fabricators use, not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.
Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚
Free delivery & install, really free
Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.
$0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
3–5 week lead time on regional routes
All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️
Warranty & lifespan
Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.
20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳
$0-down financing
Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all, fastest path to a closed deal.
RTO: $222/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders
⚡
Why 18×40?
720 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial, fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.
18′ × 40′ footprint with 720 sq ft interior
Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
Resale ROI $5,760–$8,640 added home value
PEOPLE ALSO ASK
Common questions from Detached Garage shoppers.
The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.
How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 18×40 metal building?
Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.
Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?
Yes, free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.
What’s the typical lead time for a 18×40 building?
Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.
Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?
Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month’s payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.
What’s covered under the 20-year warranty?
Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.
CUSTOMER REVIEWS
What real 18×40 Detached Garage buyers say.
⭐
No reviews yet for the 18×40 Detached Garage
Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.
A 18×40 detached garage from Steel and Stud starts at $10,650 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $222/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.
Is delivery and installation included in the 18×40 detached garage price?
Yes, every Steel and Stud detached garage ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.
Do I need a permit for a 18×40 detached garage?
Almost always for 720+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.
How is a Steel and Stud detached garage different from a wood-frame build?
Steel solves the problems wood creates, no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.
What foundation does a 18×40 detached garage need?
A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don’t already have a slab.
How fast can I get a 18×40 detached garage delivered?
Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available, call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.
Can I finance a 18×40 detached garage without a credit check?
Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month’s payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $222/month on a 18×40 detached garage.
What warranty comes with the 18×40 detached garage?
Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.
Can I customize the 18×40 detached garage in 3D before I order?
Yes, our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.
Does a 18×40 detached garage add resale value to my home?
An enclosed 18×40 detached garage typically adds $5,760–$8,640 in resale value per regional comp data, and most insurance carriers reduce premiums for indoor vehicle / equipment storage. Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust warranty transfers to the next owner.
Ready to build?
Your Detached Garage quote takes one minute.
Tell us your zip and the options you want. We’ll send back a same-day, all-in price.
720 sq ft for compact garage, RV cover, or carport
18′ x 40′14 GaugeLocal Certification Available
Pre-engineered 18×40 steel building delivers 720 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
Leg height adjustable up to 20'
$10,650.00
Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
720 sq ft for compact garage, RV cover, or carport
18′ x 40′14 GaugeLocal Certification Available
Pre-engineered 18×40 steel building delivers 720 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
18×40 Hunting Cabin Shell | Steel and Stud, From $10,650
18×40 Hunting Cabin Shell, built for hobby and recreational use.
Built for recreational use without site-build cost, this 18×40 hunting cabin shell packs 720 sq ft into a code-compliant shell. Buyers turning a 18×40 prefab building into a hunting cabin spec four walls, two windows, a.
Starting from your selected configuration$10,650$12,150Save $1,500
or as low as $222/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You’ll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request, no surprises, no hidden fees.
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-18X40-HUNTING-CABIN-SHBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
★
4.8/5
customer rating
⏱
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We’ve provided builds for
SPATIAL LAYOUT
See how 800 sq ft fits your 18×40 hunting cabin shell.
18 feet wide × 40 feet long. Built for recreational use without site-build cost, this 18×40 hunting cabin shell packs 720 sq ft into a code-compliant shell.
Hunting Cabin Shell layout.
Built for recreational use without site-build cost, this 18×40 hunting cabin shell packs 720 sq ft into a code-compliant shell. Buyers turning a 18×40 prefab building into a hunting cabin spec four walls, two windows, a 36-inch walk-in, and skip the roll-up. The shell becomes a 720 sq ft cabin floor (bunkroom, kitchen, bath, and gear room) once interior framing goes in.
💡 Pro tip:Hunting Cabin Shell works well at 18×40, add insulation + electrical for year-round use.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER
Build your 18×40 Hunting Cabin Shell in 3D.
Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer, drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.
Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim, mix & match
Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
Auto-syncs to quote, what you build is what we price
All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.
🏗️
720 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 18×40 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
Hunting Cabin Shell spec sheet.
Width18′
Length40′ + 6" overhang
Side height9′ standard
Floor space720 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES
How real buyers use Hunting Cabin Shell.
DAILY USE
Everyday hunting cabin shell
720 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a hunting cabin shell.
STORAGE OVERFLOW
hunting cabin shell + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOM
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.
FULL PRODUCT DETAILS
18×40 Hunting Cabin Shell, what makes it different.
720sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$222/mo
From RTO
🏗️
Engineered for your county
Every 18×40 hunting cabin shell is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.
Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩
Construction details
The same materials commercial fabricators use, not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.
Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚
Free delivery & install, really free
Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.
$0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
3–5 week lead time on regional routes
All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️
Warranty & lifespan
Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.
20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳
$0-down financing
Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all, fastest path to a closed deal.
RTO: $222/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders
⚡
Why 18×40?
720 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial, fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.
18′ × 40′ footprint with 720 sq ft interior
Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
Resale ROI $5,760–$8,640 added home value
PEOPLE ALSO ASK
Common questions from Hunting Cabin Shell shoppers.
The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.
How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 18×40 metal building?
Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.
Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?
Yes, free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.
What’s the typical lead time for a 18×40 building?
Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.
Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?
Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month’s payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.
What’s covered under the 20-year warranty?
Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.
CUSTOMER REVIEWS
What real 18×40 Hunting Cabin Shell buyers say.
⭐
No reviews yet for the 18×40 Hunting Cabin Shell
Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.
A 18×40 hunting cabin shell from Steel and Stud starts at $10,650 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $222/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.
Is delivery and installation included in the 18×40 hunting cabin shell price?
Yes, every Steel and Stud hunting cabin shell ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.
Do I need a permit for a 18×40 hunting cabin shell?
Almost always for 720+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.
How is a Steel and Stud hunting cabin shell different from a wood-frame build?
Steel solves the problems wood creates, no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.
What foundation does a 18×40 hunting cabin shell need?
A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don’t already have a slab.
How fast can I get a 18×40 hunting cabin shell delivered?
Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available, call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.
Can I finance a 18×40 hunting cabin shell without a credit check?
Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month’s payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $222/month on a 18×40 hunting cabin shell.
What warranty comes with the 18×40 hunting cabin shell?
Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.
Can I customize the 18×40 hunting cabin shell in 3D before I order?
Yes, our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.
Can I insulate the 18×40 hunting cabin shell for year-round use?
Yes, Steel and Stud offers R-13 wall + R-19 ceiling insulation packages, and the interior is drywall-ready. Most owners finish a hunting cabin shell to a livable retreat in 2–3 weekends. Add a mini-split HVAC at checkout for full four-season comfort.
Ready to build?
Your Hunting Cabin Shell quote takes one minute.
Tell us your zip and the options you want. We’ll send back a same-day, all-in price.
720 sq ft for compact garage, RV cover, or carport
18′ x 40′14 GaugeLocal Certification Available
Pre-engineered 18×40 steel building delivers 720 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
Leg height adjustable up to 20'
$10,650.00
Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
720 sq ft for compact garage, RV cover, or carport
18′ x 40′14 GaugeLocal Certification Available
Pre-engineered 18×40 steel building delivers 720 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
18×40 Small Commercial Storage | Steel and Stud, From $12,500
18×40 Small Commercial Storage, engineered for code-compliant business use.
Built for business owners who need fast permitted occupancy, this 18×40 small commercial storage packs 720 sq ft into a code-compliant shell. Contractors and landscapers buy a 18×40 steel building as locked job-site.
Starting from your selected configuration$12,500$14,250Save $1,750
or as low as $260/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You’ll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request, no surprises, no hidden fees.
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-18X40-SMALL-COMMERCIALBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
★
4.8/5
customer rating
⏱
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We’ve provided builds for
SPATIAL LAYOUT
See how 800 sq ft fits your 18×40 small commercial storage.
18 feet wide × 40 feet long. Built for business owners who need fast permitted occupancy, this 18×40 small commercial storage packs 720 sq ft into a code-compliant shell.
Small Commercial Storage layout.
Built for business owners who need fast permitted occupancy, this 18×40 small commercial storage packs 720 sq ft into a code-compliant shell. Contractors and landscapers buy a 18×40 steel building as locked job-site storage for trailers, mowers, and pallet inventory. The 16-foot width lets a 12-foot enclosed trailer roll in past a 18×40 roll-up, and certified engineering meets commercial county code.
💡 Pro tip:Small Commercial Storage works well at 18×40, add insulation + electrical for year-round use.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER
Build your 18×40 Small Commercial Storage in 3D.
Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer, drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.
Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim, mix & match
Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
Auto-syncs to quote, what you build is what we price
All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.
🏗️
720 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 18×40 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
Small Commercial Storage spec sheet.
Width18′
Length40′ + 6" overhang
Side height9′ standard
Floor space720 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES
How real buyers use Small Commercial Storage.
DAILY USE
Everyday small commercial storage
720 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a small commercial storage.
STORAGE OVERFLOW
small commercial storage + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOM
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.
FULL PRODUCT DETAILS
18×40 Small Commercial Storage, what makes it different.
720sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$260/mo
From RTO
🏗️
Engineered for your county
Every 18×40 small commercial storage is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.
Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩
Construction details
The same materials commercial fabricators use, not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.
Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚
Free delivery & install, really free
Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.
$0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
3–5 week lead time on regional routes
All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️
Warranty & lifespan
Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.
20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳
$0-down financing
Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all, fastest path to a closed deal.
RTO: $260/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders
⚡
Why 18×40?
720 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial, fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.
18′ × 40′ footprint with 720 sq ft interior
Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
Resale ROI $5,760–$8,640 added home value
PEOPLE ALSO ASK
Common questions from Small Commercial Storage shoppers.
The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.
How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 18×40 metal building?
Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.
Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?
Yes, free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.
What’s the typical lead time for a 18×40 building?
Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.
Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?
Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month’s payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.
What’s covered under the 20-year warranty?
Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.
CUSTOMER REVIEWS
What real 18×40 Small Commercial Storage buyers say.
⭐
No reviews yet for the 18×40 Small Commercial Storage
Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.
How much does a 18×40 small commercial storage cost?
A 18×40 small commercial storage from Steel and Stud starts at $12,500 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $260/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.
Is delivery and installation included in the 18×40 small commercial storage price?
Yes, every Steel and Stud small commercial storage ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.
Do I need a permit for a 18×40 small commercial storage?
Almost always for 720+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.
How is a Steel and Stud small commercial storage different from a wood-frame build?
Steel solves the problems wood creates, no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.
What foundation does a 18×40 small commercial storage need?
A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don’t already have a slab.
How fast can I get a 18×40 small commercial storage delivered?
Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available, call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.
Can I finance a 18×40 small commercial storage without a credit check?
Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month’s payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $260/month on a 18×40 small commercial storage.
What warranty comes with the 18×40 small commercial storage?
Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.
Can I customize the 18×40 small commercial storage in 3D before I order?
Yes, our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.
Does the 18×40 small commercial storage meet IBC commercial code?
Yes. Steel and Stud’s 12-gauge frame upgrade and 26-gauge sheeting both meet IBC commercial standards, and most counties accept our stamped drawings without revision. Engineered loads ship with the order, typical certified specs are 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow.
Ready to build?
Your Small Commercial Storage quote takes one minute.
Tell us your zip and the options you want. We’ll send back a same-day, all-in price.
720 sq ft for compact garage, RV cover, or carport
18′ x 40′14 GaugeLocal Certification Available
Pre-engineered 18×40 steel building delivers 720 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
Leg height adjustable up to 20'
$12,500.00
Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
720 sq ft for compact garage, RV cover, or carport
18′ x 40′14 GaugeLocal Certification Available
Pre-engineered 18×40 steel building delivers 720 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
18×40 Man Cave / She Shed | Steel and Stud, From $10,650
18×40 Man Cave / She Shed, built for daily backyard use.
Built for homeowners who want more covered space, this 18×40 man cave / she shed packs 720 sq ft into a code-compliant shell. Homeowners convert a 18×40 building kit into a 720 sq ft hangout: pool table on one end, bar.
You’re viewing:Man Cave / She Shed·Size18×40·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$10,650$12,150Save $1,500
or as low as $222/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You’ll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request, no surprises, no hidden fees.
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-18X40-MAN-CAVE-SHE-SHEBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
★
4.8/5
customer rating
⏱
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We’ve provided builds for
SPATIAL LAYOUT
See how 800 sq ft fits your 18×40 man cave / she shed.
18 feet wide × 40 feet long. Built for homeowners who want more covered space, this 18×40 man cave / she shed packs 720 sq ft into a code-compliant shell.
Man Cave / She Shed layout.
Built for homeowners who want more covered space, this 18×40 man cave / she shed packs 720 sq ft into a code-compliant shell. Homeowners convert a 18×40 building kit into a 720 sq ft hangout: pool table on one end, bar and lounge on the other, French doors out to the patio. R-19 batt and a mini-split make it four-season. Two-tone wainscoting reads as residential, not industrial.
💡 Pro tip:Man Cave / She Shed works well at 18×40, add insulation + electrical for year-round use.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER
Build your 18×40 Man Cave / She Shed in 3D.
Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer, drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.
Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim, mix & match
Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
Auto-syncs to quote, what you build is what we price
All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.
🏗️
720 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 18×40 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
Man Cave / She Shed spec sheet.
Width18′
Length40′ + 6" overhang
Side height9′ standard
Floor space720 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES
How real buyers use Man Cave / She Shed.
DAILY USE
Everyday man cave / she shed
720 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a man cave / she shed.
STORAGE OVERFLOW
man cave / she shed + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOM
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.
FULL PRODUCT DETAILS
18×40 Man Cave / She Shed, what makes it different.
720sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$222/mo
From RTO
🏗️
Engineered for your county
Every 18×40 man cave / she shed is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.
Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩
Construction details
The same materials commercial fabricators use, not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.
Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚
Free delivery & install, really free
Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.
$0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
3–5 week lead time on regional routes
All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️
Warranty & lifespan
Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.
20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳
$0-down financing
Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all, fastest path to a closed deal.
RTO: $222/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders
⚡
Why 18×40?
720 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial, fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.
18′ × 40′ footprint with 720 sq ft interior
Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
Resale ROI $5,760–$8,640 added home value
PEOPLE ALSO ASK
Common questions from Man Cave / She Shed shoppers.
The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.
How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 18×40 metal building?
Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.
Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?
Yes, free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.
What’s the typical lead time for a 18×40 building?
Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.
Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?
Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month’s payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.
What’s covered under the 20-year warranty?
Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.
CUSTOMER REVIEWS
What real 18×40 Man Cave / She Shed buyers say.
⭐
No reviews yet for the 18×40 Man Cave / She Shed
Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.
A 18×40 man cave / she shed from Steel and Stud starts at $10,650 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $222/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.
Is delivery and installation included in the 18×40 man cave / she shed price?
Yes, every Steel and Stud man cave / she shed ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.
Do I need a permit for a 18×40 man cave / she shed?
Almost always for 720+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.
How is a Steel and Stud man cave / she shed different from a wood-frame build?
Steel solves the problems wood creates, no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.
What foundation does a 18×40 man cave / she shed need?
A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don’t already have a slab.
How fast can I get a 18×40 man cave / she shed delivered?
Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available, call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.
Can I finance a 18×40 man cave / she shed without a credit check?
Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month’s payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $222/month on a 18×40 man cave / she shed.
What warranty comes with the 18×40 man cave / she shed?
Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.
Can I customize the 18×40 man cave / she shed in 3D before I order?
Yes, our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.
Does a 18×40 man cave / she shed add resale value to my home?
An enclosed 18×40 man cave / she shed typically adds $5,760–$8,640 in resale value per regional comp data, and most insurance carriers reduce premiums for indoor vehicle / equipment storage. Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust warranty transfers to the next owner.
Ready to build?
Your Man Cave / She Shed quote takes one minute.
Tell us your zip and the options you want. We’ll send back a same-day, all-in price.
720 sq ft for compact garage, RV cover, or carport
18′ x 40′14 GaugeLocal Certification Available
Pre-engineered 18×40 steel building delivers 720 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
Leg height adjustable up to 20'
$10,650.00
Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
720 sq ft for compact garage, RV cover, or carport
18′ x 40′14 GaugeLocal Certification Available
Pre-engineered 18×40 steel building delivers 720 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
18×40 Mechanic’s Shop | Steel and Stud, From $12,500
18×40 Mechanic’s Shop, engineered for code-compliant business use.
Looking for a 18×40 mechanic’s shop? At 720 sq ft, this footprint suits small businesses, retail, or service shops. Side-business mechanics need 12-foot legs minimum to clear a two-post lift with a truck on it. The.
Starting from your selected configuration$12,500$14,250Save $1,750
or as low as $260/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You’ll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request, no surprises, no hidden fees.
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-18X40-MECHANIC-S-SHOPBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
★
4.8/5
customer rating
⏱
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We’ve provided builds for
SPATIAL LAYOUT
See how 800 sq ft fits your 18×40 mechanic’s shop.
18 feet wide × 40 feet long. Looking for a 18×40 mechanic’s shop? At 720 sq ft, this footprint suits small businesses, retail, or service shops.
Mechanic’s Shop layout.
Looking for a 18×40 mechanic’s shop? At 720 sq ft, this footprint suits small businesses, retail, or service shops. Side-business mechanics need 12-foot legs minimum to clear a two-post lift with a truck on it. The 18×40 fits one lift, a tool chest wall, and a parts shelf. 12-gauge framing handles the lift’s anchor loads, and a concrete slab is mandatory at this height.
💡 Pro tip:Mechanic’s Shop works well at 18×40, add insulation + electrical for year-round use.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER
Build your 18×40 Mechanic’s Shop in 3D.
Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer, drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.
Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim, mix & match
Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
Auto-syncs to quote, what you build is what we price
All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.
🏗️
720 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 18×40 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
Mechanic’s Shop spec sheet.
Width18′
Length40′ + 6" overhang
Side height9′ standard
Floor space720 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES
How real buyers use Mechanic’s Shop.
DAILY USE
Everyday mechanic’s shop
720 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a mechanic’s shop.
STORAGE OVERFLOW
mechanic’s shop + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOM
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.
FULL PRODUCT DETAILS
18×40 Mechanic’s Shop, what makes it different.
720sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$260/mo
From RTO
🏗️
Engineered for your county
Every 18×40 mechanic’s shop is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.
Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩
Construction details
The same materials commercial fabricators use, not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.
Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚
Free delivery & install, really free
Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.
$0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
3–5 week lead time on regional routes
All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️
Warranty & lifespan
Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.
20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳
$0-down financing
Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all, fastest path to a closed deal.
RTO: $260/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders
⚡
Why 18×40?
720 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial, fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.
18′ × 40′ footprint with 720 sq ft interior
Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
Resale ROI $5,760–$8,640 added home value
PEOPLE ALSO ASK
Common questions from Mechanic’s Shop shoppers.
The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.
How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 18×40 metal building?
Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.
Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?
Yes, free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.
What’s the typical lead time for a 18×40 building?
Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.
Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?
Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month’s payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.
What’s covered under the 20-year warranty?
Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.
CUSTOMER REVIEWS
What real 18×40 Mechanic’s Shop buyers say.
⭐
No reviews yet for the 18×40 Mechanic’s Shop
Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.
A 18×40 mechanic’s shop from Steel and Stud starts at $12,500 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $260/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.
Is delivery and installation included in the 18×40 mechanic’s shop price?
Yes, every Steel and Stud mechanic’s shop ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.
Do I need a permit for a 18×40 mechanic’s shop?
Almost always for 720+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.
How is a Steel and Stud mechanic’s shop different from a wood-frame build?
Steel solves the problems wood creates, no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.
What foundation does a 18×40 mechanic’s shop need?
A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don’t already have a slab.
How fast can I get a 18×40 mechanic’s shop delivered?
Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available, call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.
Can I finance a 18×40 mechanic’s shop without a credit check?
Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month’s payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $260/month on a 18×40 mechanic’s shop.
What warranty comes with the 18×40 mechanic’s shop?
Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.
Can I customize the 18×40 mechanic’s shop in 3D before I order?
Yes, our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.
Does the 18×40 mechanic’s shop meet IBC commercial code?
Yes. Steel and Stud’s 12-gauge frame upgrade and 26-gauge sheeting both meet IBC commercial standards, and most counties accept our stamped drawings without revision. Engineered loads ship with the order, typical certified specs are 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow.
Ready to build?
Your Mechanic’s Shop quote takes one minute.
Tell us your zip and the options you want. We’ll send back a same-day, all-in price.
720 sq ft for compact garage, RV cover, or carport
18′ x 40′14 GaugeLocal Certification Available
Pre-engineered 18×40 steel building delivers 720 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
Leg height adjustable up to 20'
$12,500.00
Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
720 sq ft for compact garage, RV cover, or carport
18′ x 40′14 GaugeLocal Certification Available
Pre-engineered 18×40 steel building delivers 720 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
18×40 Hay & Feed Lean-To Base | Steel and Stud, From $11,300
18×40 Hay & Feed Lean-To Base, built for farm and ranch demands.
18×40 delivers 720 sq ft of rugged hay & feed lean-to base space. Hobby farmers spec a 18×40 enclosed core with a 18×40 lean-to off one side, total covered footprint hits 1,720 sq ft. Hay bales stack inside dry, while.
Starting from your selected configuration$11,300$12,900Save $1,600
or as low as $235/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You’ll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request, no surprises, no hidden fees.
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-18X40-HAY-FEED-LEAN-TOBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
★
4.8/5
customer rating
⏱
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We’ve provided builds for
SPATIAL LAYOUT
See how 800 sq ft fits your 18×40 hay & feed lean-to base.
18 feet wide × 40 feet long. 18×40 delivers 720 sq ft of rugged hay & feed lean-to base space.
Hay & Feed Lean-To Base layout.
18×40 delivers 720 sq ft of rugged hay & feed lean-to base space. Hobby farmers spec a 18×40 enclosed core with a 18×40 lean-to off one side, total covered footprint hits 1,720 sq ft. Hay bales stack inside dry, while tractor and loader park under the lean-to. Single sloped roof on the lean-to sheds rain away from the main roll-up.
💡 Pro tip:Hay & Feed Lean-To Base works well at 18×40, add insulation + electrical for year-round use.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER
Build your 18×40 Hay & Feed Lean-To Base in 3D.
Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer, drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.
Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim, mix & match
Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
Auto-syncs to quote, what you build is what we price
All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.
🏗️
720 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 18×40 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
Hay & Feed Lean-To Base spec sheet.
Width18′
Length40′ + 6" overhang
Side height9′ standard
Floor space720 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES
How real buyers use Hay & Feed Lean-To Base.
DAILY USE
Everyday hay & feed lean-to base
720 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a hay & feed lean-to base.
STORAGE OVERFLOW
hay & feed lean-to base + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOM
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.
FULL PRODUCT DETAILS
18×40 Hay & Feed Lean-To Base, what makes it different.
720sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$235/mo
From RTO
🏗️
Engineered for your county
Every 18×40 hay & feed lean-to base is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.
Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩
Construction details
The same materials commercial fabricators use, not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.
Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚
Free delivery & install, really free
Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.
$0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
3–5 week lead time on regional routes
All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️
Warranty & lifespan
Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.
20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳
$0-down financing
Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all, fastest path to a closed deal.
RTO: $235/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders
⚡
Why 18×40?
720 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial, fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.
18′ × 40′ footprint with 720 sq ft interior
Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
Resale ROI $5,760–$8,640 added home value
PEOPLE ALSO ASK
Common questions from Hay & Feed Lean-To Base shoppers.
The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.
How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 18×40 metal building?
Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.
Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?
Yes, free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.
What’s the typical lead time for a 18×40 building?
Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.
Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?
Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month’s payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.
What’s covered under the 20-year warranty?
Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.
CUSTOMER REVIEWS
What real 18×40 Hay & Feed Lean-To Base buyers say.
⭐
No reviews yet for the 18×40 Hay & Feed Lean-To Base
Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.
How much does a 18×40 hay & feed lean-to base cost?
A 18×40 hay & feed lean-to base from Steel and Stud starts at $11,300 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $235/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.
Is delivery and installation included in the 18×40 hay & feed lean-to base price?
Yes, every Steel and Stud hay & feed lean-to base ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.
Do I need a permit for a 18×40 hay & feed lean-to base?
Almost always for 720+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.
How is a Steel and Stud hay & feed lean-to base different from a wood-frame build?
Steel solves the problems wood creates, no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.
What foundation does a 18×40 hay & feed lean-to base need?
A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don’t already have a slab.
How fast can I get a 18×40 hay & feed lean-to base delivered?
Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available, call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.
Can I finance a 18×40 hay & feed lean-to base without a credit check?
Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month’s payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $235/month on a 18×40 hay & feed lean-to base.
What warranty comes with the 18×40 hay & feed lean-to base?
Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.
Can I customize the 18×40 hay & feed lean-to base in 3D before I order?
Yes, our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.
Will the 18×40 hay & feed lean-to base stand up to livestock and Midwest weather?
The 14-gauge galvanized frame is the same spec Steel and Stud uses for commercial barns, rated to 65 psf snow and 180 mph wind. Ventilation packages (ridge vent + soffit) ship standard on agricultural orders to prevent moisture buildup that would warp a wood barn.
Ready to build?
Your Hay & Feed Lean-To Base quote takes one minute.
Tell us your zip and the options you want. We’ll send back a same-day, all-in price.
720 sq ft for compact garage, RV cover, or carport
18′ x 40′14 GaugeLocal Certification Available
Pre-engineered 18×40 steel building delivers 720 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
Leg height adjustable up to 20'
$11,300.00
Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
400 sq ft for compact garage, RV cover, or carport
20′ x 20′14 GaugeLocal Certification Available
Pre-engineered 20×20 steel building delivers 400 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
20×20 One-Car Garage | Steel and Stud, From $5,900
20×20 One-Car Garage, built for daily backyard use.
20×20 delivers 400 sq ft of everyday one-car garage space. Homeowners replacing a tired wood-frame garage pick this footprint because it fits a full-size sedan or mid-size SUV with 3 ft of side clearance for opening.
Starting from your selected configuration$5,900$6,750Save $850
or as low as $123/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You’ll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request, no surprises, no hidden fees.
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-20X20-ONE-CAR-GARAGEBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
★
4.8/5
customer rating
⏱
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We’ve provided builds for
SPATIAL LAYOUT
See how 800 sq ft fits your 20×20 one-car garage.
20 feet wide × 20 feet long. 20×20 delivers 400 sq ft of everyday one-car garage space.
One-Car Garage layout.
20×20 delivers 400 sq ft of everyday one-car garage space. Homeowners replacing a tired wood-frame garage pick this footprint because it fits a full-size sedan or mid-size SUV with 3 ft of side clearance for opening doors. The extra 2 ft over a 16-wide gives you a real walk-around. Adds resale value and code-compliant covered parking.
💡 Pro tip:One-Car Garage works well at 20×20, add insulation + electrical for year-round use.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER
Build your 20×20 One-Car Garage in 3D.
Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer, drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.
Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim, mix & match
Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
Auto-syncs to quote, what you build is what we price
All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.
🏗️
400 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 20×20 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
One-Car Garage spec sheet.
Width20′
Length20′ + 6" overhang
Side height9′ standard
Floor space400 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES
How real buyers use One-Car Garage.
DAILY USE
Everyday one-car garage
400 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a one-car garage.
STORAGE OVERFLOW
one-car garage + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOM
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.
FULL PRODUCT DETAILS
20×20 One-Car Garage, what makes it different.
400sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$123/mo
From RTO
🏗️
Engineered for your county
Every 20×20 one-car garage is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.
Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩
Construction details
The same materials commercial fabricators use, not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.
Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚
Free delivery & install, really free
Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.
$0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
3–5 week lead time on regional routes
All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️
Warranty & lifespan
Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.
20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳
$0-down financing
Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all, fastest path to a closed deal.
RTO: $123/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders
⚡
Why 20×20?
400 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial, fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.
20′ × 20′ footprint with 400 sq ft interior
Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
Resale ROI $3,200–$4,800 added home value
PEOPLE ALSO ASK
Common questions from One-Car Garage shoppers.
The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.
How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 20×20 metal building?
Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.
Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?
Yes, free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.
What’s the typical lead time for a 20×20 building?
Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.
Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?
Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month’s payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.
What’s covered under the 20-year warranty?
Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.
CUSTOMER REVIEWS
What real 20×20 One-Car Garage buyers say.
⭐
No reviews yet for the 20×20 One-Car Garage
Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.
A 20×20 one-car garage from Steel and Stud starts at $5,900 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $123/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.
Is delivery and installation included in the 20×20 one-car garage price?
Yes, every Steel and Stud one-car garage ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.
Do I need a permit for a 20×20 one-car garage?
Almost always for 400+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.
How is a Steel and Stud one-car garage different from a wood-frame build?
Steel solves the problems wood creates, no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.
What foundation does a 20×20 one-car garage need?
A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don’t already have a slab.
How fast can I get a 20×20 one-car garage delivered?
Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available, call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.
Can I finance a 20×20 one-car garage without a credit check?
Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month’s payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $123/month on a 20×20 one-car garage.
What warranty comes with the 20×20 one-car garage?
Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.
Can I customize the 20×20 one-car garage in 3D before I order?
Yes, our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.
Does a 20×20 one-car garage add resale value to my home?
An enclosed 20×20 one-car garage typically adds $3,200–$4,800 in resale value per regional comp data, and most insurance carriers reduce premiums for indoor vehicle / equipment storage. Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust warranty transfers to the next owner.
Ready to build?
Your One-Car Garage quote takes one minute.
Tell us your zip and the options you want. We’ll send back a same-day, all-in price.
400 sq ft for compact garage, RV cover, or carport
20′ x 20′14 GaugeLocal Certification Available
Pre-engineered 20×20 steel building delivers 400 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
Leg height adjustable up to 20'
$5,900.00
Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
400 sq ft for compact garage, RV cover, or carport
20′ x 20′14 GaugeLocal Certification Available
Pre-engineered 20×20 steel building delivers 400 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
20×20 Backyard Workshop | Steel and Stud, From $5,900
20×20 Backyard Workshop, built for daily backyard use.
A 400 sq ft workshop fits a workbench wall, tool storage, mower parking, small woodworking equipment, and weekend project space without taking over the main garage.
Starting from your selected configuration$5,900$6,750Save $850
or as low as $123/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You’ll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request, no surprises, no hidden fees.
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-20X20-BACKYARD-WORKSHOBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
★
4.8/5
customer rating
⏱
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We’ve provided builds for
SPATIAL LAYOUT
See how 800 sq ft fits your 20×20 backyard workshop.
20 feet wide × 20 feet long. A 400 sq ft workshop fits a workbench wall, tool storage, mower parking, small woodworking equipment, and weekend project space without taking over the main garage.
Backyard Workshop layout.
A 400 sq ft workshop fits a workbench wall, tool storage, mower parking, small woodworking equipment, and weekend project space without taking over the main garage.
💡 Pro tip:Backyard Workshop works well at 20×20, add insulation + electrical for year-round use.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER
Build your 20×20 Backyard Workshop in 3D.
Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer, drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.
Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim, mix & match
Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
Auto-syncs to quote, what you build is what we price
All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.
🏗️
400 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 20×20 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
Backyard Workshop spec sheet.
Width20′
Length20′ + 6" overhang
Side height9′ standard
Floor space400 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES
How real buyers use Backyard Workshop.
DAILY USE
Everyday backyard workshop
400 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a backyard workshop.
STORAGE OVERFLOW
backyard workshop + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOM
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.
FULL PRODUCT DETAILS
20×20 Backyard Workshop, what makes it different.
400sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$123/mo
From RTO
🏗️
Engineered for your county
Every 20×20 backyard workshop is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.
Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩
Construction details
The same materials commercial fabricators use, not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.
Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚
Free delivery & install, really free
Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.
$0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
3–5 week lead time on regional routes
All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️
Warranty & lifespan
Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.
20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳
$0-down financing
Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all, fastest path to a closed deal.
RTO: $123/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders
⚡
Why 20×20?
400 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial, fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.
20′ × 20′ footprint with 400 sq ft interior
Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
Resale ROI $3,200–$4,800 added home value
PEOPLE ALSO ASK
Common questions from Backyard Workshop shoppers.
The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.
How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 20×20 metal building?
Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.
Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?
Yes, free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.
What’s the typical lead time for a 20×20 building?
Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.
Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?
Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month’s payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.
What’s covered under the 20-year warranty?
Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.
CUSTOMER REVIEWS
What real 20×20 Backyard Workshop buyers say.
⭐
No reviews yet for the 20×20 Backyard Workshop
Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.
A 20×20 backyard workshop from Steel and Stud starts at $5,900 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $123/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.
Is delivery and installation included in the 20×20 backyard workshop price?
Yes, every Steel and Stud backyard workshop ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.
Do I need a permit for a 20×20 backyard workshop?
Almost always for 400+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.
How is a Steel and Stud backyard workshop different from a wood-frame build?
Steel solves the problems wood creates, no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.
What foundation does a 20×20 backyard workshop need?
A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don’t already have a slab.
How fast can I get a 20×20 backyard workshop delivered?
Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available, call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.
Can I finance a 20×20 backyard workshop without a credit check?
Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month’s payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $123/month on a 20×20 backyard workshop.
What warranty comes with the 20×20 backyard workshop?
Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.
Can I customize the 20×20 backyard workshop in 3D before I order?
Yes, our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.
Does a 20×20 backyard workshop add resale value to my home?
An enclosed 20×20 backyard workshop typically adds $3,200–$4,800 in resale value per regional comp data, and most insurance carriers reduce premiums for indoor vehicle / equipment storage. Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust warranty transfers to the next owner.
Ready to build?
Your Backyard Workshop quote takes one minute.
Tell us your zip and the options you want. We’ll send back a same-day, all-in price.
400 sq ft for compact garage, RV cover, or carport
20′ x 20′14 GaugeLocal Certification Available
Pre-engineered 20×20 steel building delivers 400 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
Leg height adjustable up to 20'
$5,900.00
Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
400 sq ft for compact garage, RV cover, or carport
20′ x 20′14 GaugeLocal Certification Available
Pre-engineered 20×20 steel building delivers 400 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
Looking for a 20×20 storage shed? At 400 sq ft, this footprint suits homeowners adding garage, workshop, or hobby space. Small property owners who outgrew a 20×20 plastic shed step up to an 20×20 metal shed for ride-on.
You’re viewing:Storage Shed·Size20×20·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$5,900$6,750Save $850
or as low as $123/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You’ll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request, no surprises, no hidden fees.
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-20X20-STORAGE-SHEDBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
★
4.8/5
customer rating
⏱
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We’ve provided builds for
SPATIAL LAYOUT
See how 800 sq ft fits your 20×20 storage shed.
20 feet wide × 20 feet long. Looking for a 20×20 storage shed? At 400 sq ft, this footprint suits homeowners adding garage, workshop, or hobby space.
Storage Shed layout.
Looking for a 20×20 storage shed? At 400 sq ft, this footprint suits homeowners adding garage, workshop, or hobby space. Small property owners who outgrew a 20×20 plastic shed step up to an 20×20 metal shed for ride-on mower, snow-blower, kayaks, and seasonal patio furniture all in one steel-walled enclosure. A double-roll-up on the gable end lets you back the mower in straight. Far cheaper than building a wood storage shed.
💡 Pro tip:Storage Shed works well at 20×20, add insulation + electrical for year-round use.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER
Build your 20×20 Storage Shed in 3D.
Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer, drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.
Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim, mix & match
Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
Auto-syncs to quote, what you build is what we price
All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.
🏗️
400 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 20×20 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
Storage Shed spec sheet.
Width20′
Length20′ + 6" overhang
Side height9′ standard
Floor space400 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES
How real buyers use Storage Shed.
DAILY USE
Everyday storage shed
400 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a storage shed.
STORAGE OVERFLOW
storage shed + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOM
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.
FULL PRODUCT DETAILS
20×20 Storage Shed, what makes it different.
400sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$123/mo
From RTO
🏗️
Engineered for your county
Every 20×20 storage shed is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.
Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩
Construction details
The same materials commercial fabricators use, not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.
Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚
Free delivery & install, really free
Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.
$0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
3–5 week lead time on regional routes
All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️
Warranty & lifespan
Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.
20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳
$0-down financing
Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all, fastest path to a closed deal.
RTO: $123/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders
⚡
Why 20×20?
400 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial, fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.
20′ × 20′ footprint with 400 sq ft interior
Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
Resale ROI $3,200–$4,800 added home value
PEOPLE ALSO ASK
Common questions from Storage Shed shoppers.
The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.
How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 20×20 metal building?
Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.
Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?
Yes, free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.
What’s the typical lead time for a 20×20 building?
Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.
Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?
Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month’s payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.
What’s covered under the 20-year warranty?
Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.
CUSTOMER REVIEWS
What real 20×20 Storage Shed buyers say.
⭐
No reviews yet for the 20×20 Storage Shed
Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.
A 20×20 storage shed from Steel and Stud starts at $5,900 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $123/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.
Is delivery and installation included in the 20×20 storage shed price?
Yes, every Steel and Stud storage shed ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.
Do I need a permit for a 20×20 storage shed?
Almost always for 400+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.
How is a Steel and Stud storage shed different from a wood-frame build?
Steel solves the problems wood creates, no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.
What foundation does a 20×20 storage shed need?
A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don’t already have a slab.
How fast can I get a 20×20 storage shed delivered?
Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available, call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.
Can I finance a 20×20 storage shed without a credit check?
Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month’s payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $123/month on a 20×20 storage shed.
What warranty comes with the 20×20 storage shed?
Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.
Can I customize the 20×20 storage shed in 3D before I order?
Yes, our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.
Does a 20×20 storage shed add resale value to my home?
An enclosed 20×20 storage shed typically adds $3,200–$4,800 in resale value per regional comp data, and most insurance carriers reduce premiums for indoor vehicle / equipment storage. Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust warranty transfers to the next owner.
Ready to build?
Your Storage Shed quote takes one minute.
Tell us your zip and the options you want. We’ll send back a same-day, all-in price.
400 sq ft for compact garage, RV cover, or carport
20′ x 20′14 GaugeLocal Certification Available
Pre-engineered 20×20 steel building delivers 400 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
Leg height adjustable up to 20'
$5,900.00
Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
400 sq ft for compact garage, RV cover, or carport
20′ x 20′14 GaugeLocal Certification Available
Pre-engineered 20×20 steel building delivers 400 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
20×20 Garage with Loft | Steel and Stud, From $5,900
20×20 Garage with Loft, built for daily backyard use.
20×20 delivers 400 sq ft of everyday garage with loft space. Homeowners who want vertical storage spec 12-14 ft legs and add an engineered mezzanine over the back 8 ft of the building. The loft holds seasonal totes.
You’re viewing:Garage with Loft·Size20×20·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$5,900$6,750Save $850
or as low as $123/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You’ll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request, no surprises, no hidden fees.
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-20X20-GARAGE-LOFTBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
★
4.8/5
customer rating
⏱
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We’ve provided builds for
SPATIAL LAYOUT
See how 800 sq ft fits your 20×20 garage with loft.
20 feet wide × 20 feet long. 20×20 delivers 400 sq ft of everyday garage with loft space.
Garage with Loft layout.
20×20 delivers 400 sq ft of everyday garage with loft space. Homeowners who want vertical storage spec 12-14 ft legs and add an engineered mezzanine over the back 8 ft of the building. The loft holds seasonal totes, hunting gear, or a future bunk space while the floor stays open for the vehicle. Stamped drawings cover the loft load.
💡 Pro tip:Garage with Loft works well at 20×20, add insulation + electrical for year-round use.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER
Build your 20×20 Garage with Loft in 3D.
Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer, drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.
Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim, mix & match
Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
Auto-syncs to quote, what you build is what we price
All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.
🏗️
400 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 20×20 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
Garage with Loft spec sheet.
Width20′
Length20′ + 6" overhang
Side height9′ standard
Floor space400 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES
How real buyers use Garage with Loft.
DAILY USE
Everyday garage with loft
400 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a garage with loft.
STORAGE OVERFLOW
garage with loft + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOM
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.
FULL PRODUCT DETAILS
20×20 Garage with Loft, what makes it different.
400sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$123/mo
From RTO
🏗️
Engineered for your county
Every 20×20 garage with loft is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.
Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩
Construction details
The same materials commercial fabricators use, not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.
Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚
Free delivery & install, really free
Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.
$0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
3–5 week lead time on regional routes
All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️
Warranty & lifespan
Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.
20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳
$0-down financing
Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all, fastest path to a closed deal.
RTO: $123/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders
⚡
Why 20×20?
400 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial, fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.
20′ × 20′ footprint with 400 sq ft interior
Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
Resale ROI $3,200–$4,800 added home value
PEOPLE ALSO ASK
Common questions from Garage with Loft shoppers.
The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.
How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 20×20 metal building?
Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.
Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?
Yes, free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.
What’s the typical lead time for a 20×20 building?
Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.
Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?
Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month’s payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.
What’s covered under the 20-year warranty?
Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.
CUSTOMER REVIEWS
What real 20×20 Garage with Loft buyers say.
⭐
No reviews yet for the 20×20 Garage with Loft
Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.
A 20×20 garage with loft from Steel and Stud starts at $5,900 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $123/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.
Is delivery and installation included in the 20×20 garage with loft price?
Yes, every Steel and Stud garage with loft ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.
Do I need a permit for a 20×20 garage with loft?
Almost always for 400+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.
How is a Steel and Stud garage with loft different from a wood-frame build?
Steel solves the problems wood creates, no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.
What foundation does a 20×20 garage with loft need?
A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don’t already have a slab.
How fast can I get a 20×20 garage with loft delivered?
Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available, call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.
Can I finance a 20×20 garage with loft without a credit check?
Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month’s payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $123/month on a 20×20 garage with loft.
What warranty comes with the 20×20 garage with loft?
Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.
Can I customize the 20×20 garage with loft in 3D before I order?
Yes, our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.
Does a 20×20 garage with loft add resale value to my home?
An enclosed 20×20 garage with loft typically adds $3,200–$4,800 in resale value per regional comp data, and most insurance carriers reduce premiums for indoor vehicle / equipment storage. Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust warranty transfers to the next owner.
Ready to build?
Your Garage with Loft quote takes one minute.
Tell us your zip and the options you want. We’ll send back a same-day, all-in price.
400 sq ft for compact garage, RV cover, or carport
20′ x 20′14 GaugeLocal Certification Available
Pre-engineered 20×20 steel building delivers 400 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
Leg height adjustable up to 20'
$5,900.00
Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
400 sq ft for compact garage, RV cover, or carport
20′ x 20′14 GaugeLocal Certification Available
Pre-engineered 20×20 steel building delivers 400 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
Looking for a 20×20 home office? At 400 sq ft, this footprint suits homeowners adding garage, workshop, or hobby space. Remote workers spec R-19 batt insulation, a mini-split, and a French-door entry to turn 400 sq ft.
You’re viewing:Home Office·Size20×20·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$5,900$6,750Save $850
or as low as $123/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You’ll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request, no surprises, no hidden fees.
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-20X20-HOME-OFFICEBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
★
4.8/5
customer rating
⏱
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We’ve provided builds for
SPATIAL LAYOUT
See how 800 sq ft fits your 20×20 home office.
20 feet wide × 20 feet long. Looking for a 20×20 home office? At 400 sq ft, this footprint suits homeowners adding garage, workshop, or hobby space.
Home Office layout.
Looking for a 20×20 home office? At 400 sq ft, this footprint suits homeowners adding garage, workshop, or hobby space. Remote workers spec R-19 batt insulation, a mini-split, and a French-door entry to turn 400 sq ft into a permitted home office detached from the main house. Holds a desk, conference seating for four, and a printer credenza. Insulated metal panels keep it usable year-round in any climate zone.
💡 Pro tip:Home Office works well at 20×20, add insulation + electrical for year-round use.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER
Build your 20×20 Home Office in 3D.
Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer, drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.
Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim, mix & match
Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
Auto-syncs to quote, what you build is what we price
All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.
🏗️
400 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 20×20 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
Home Office spec sheet.
Width20′
Length20′ + 6" overhang
Side height9′ standard
Floor space400 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES
How real buyers use Home Office.
DAILY USE
Everyday home office
400 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a home office.
STORAGE OVERFLOW
home office + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOM
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.
FULL PRODUCT DETAILS
20×20 Home Office, what makes it different.
400sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$123/mo
From RTO
🏗️
Engineered for your county
Every 20×20 home office is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.
Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩
Construction details
The same materials commercial fabricators use, not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.
Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚
Free delivery & install, really free
Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.
$0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
3–5 week lead time on regional routes
All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️
Warranty & lifespan
Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.
20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳
$0-down financing
Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all, fastest path to a closed deal.
RTO: $123/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders
⚡
Why 20×20?
400 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial, fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.
20′ × 20′ footprint with 400 sq ft interior
Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
Resale ROI $3,200–$4,800 added home value
PEOPLE ALSO ASK
Common questions from Home Office shoppers.
The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.
How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 20×20 metal building?
Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.
Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?
Yes, free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.
What’s the typical lead time for a 20×20 building?
Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.
Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?
Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month’s payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.
What’s covered under the 20-year warranty?
Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.
CUSTOMER REVIEWS
What real 20×20 Home Office buyers say.
⭐
No reviews yet for the 20×20 Home Office
Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.
A 20×20 home office from Steel and Stud starts at $5,900 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $123/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.
Is delivery and installation included in the 20×20 home office price?
Yes, every Steel and Stud home office ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.
Do I need a permit for a 20×20 home office?
Almost always for 400+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.
How is a Steel and Stud home office different from a wood-frame build?
Steel solves the problems wood creates, no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.
What foundation does a 20×20 home office need?
A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don’t already have a slab.
How fast can I get a 20×20 home office delivered?
Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available, call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.
Can I finance a 20×20 home office without a credit check?
Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month’s payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $123/month on a 20×20 home office.
What warranty comes with the 20×20 home office?
Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.
Can I customize the 20×20 home office in 3D before I order?
Yes, our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.
Does a 20×20 home office add resale value to my home?
An enclosed 20×20 home office typically adds $3,200–$4,800 in resale value per regional comp data, and most insurance carriers reduce premiums for indoor vehicle / equipment storage. Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust warranty transfers to the next owner.
Ready to build?
Your Home Office quote takes one minute.
Tell us your zip and the options you want. We’ll send back a same-day, all-in price.
400 sq ft for compact garage, RV cover, or carport
20′ x 20′14 GaugeLocal Certification Available
Pre-engineered 20×20 steel building delivers 400 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
Leg height adjustable up to 20'
$5,900.00
Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
400 sq ft for compact garage, RV cover, or carport
20′ x 20′14 GaugeLocal Certification Available
Pre-engineered 20×20 steel building delivers 400 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
Looking for a 20×20 hobby room? At 400 sq ft, this footprint suits homeowners adding garage, workshop, or hobby space. Hobbyists running model trains, RC cars, ham radio, or pottery wheels use the full 400 sq ft as a.
You’re viewing:Hobby Room·Size20×20·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$5,900$6,750Save $850
or as low as $123/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You’ll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request, no surprises, no hidden fees.
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-20X20-HOBBY-ROOMBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
★
4.8/5
customer rating
⏱
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We’ve provided builds for
SPATIAL LAYOUT
See how 800 sq ft fits your 20×20 hobby room.
20 feet wide × 20 feet long. Looking for a 20×20 hobby room? At 400 sq ft, this footprint suits homeowners adding garage, workshop, or hobby space.
Hobby Room layout.
Looking for a 20×20 hobby room? At 400 sq ft, this footprint suits homeowners adding garage, workshop, or hobby space. Hobbyists running model trains, RC cars, ham radio, or pottery wheels use the full 400 sq ft as a dedicated room away from the house. A 12 ft leg height fits ceiling-mounted antennas or a kiln vent. Insulation plus a window AC keeps the temperature stable.
💡 Pro tip:Hobby Room works well at 20×20, add insulation + electrical for year-round use.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER
Build your 20×20 Hobby Room in 3D.
Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer, drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.
Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim, mix & match
Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
Auto-syncs to quote, what you build is what we price
All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.
🏗️
400 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 20×20 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
Hobby Room spec sheet.
Width20′
Length20′ + 6" overhang
Side height9′ standard
Floor space400 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES
How real buyers use Hobby Room.
DAILY USE
Everyday hobby room
400 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a hobby room.
STORAGE OVERFLOW
hobby room + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOM
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.
FULL PRODUCT DETAILS
20×20 Hobby Room, what makes it different.
400sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$123/mo
From RTO
🏗️
Engineered for your county
Every 20×20 hobby room is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.
Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩
Construction details
The same materials commercial fabricators use, not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.
Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚
Free delivery & install, really free
Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.
$0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
3–5 week lead time on regional routes
All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️
Warranty & lifespan
Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.
20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳
$0-down financing
Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all, fastest path to a closed deal.
RTO: $123/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders
⚡
Why 20×20?
400 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial, fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.
20′ × 20′ footprint with 400 sq ft interior
Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
Resale ROI $3,200–$4,800 added home value
PEOPLE ALSO ASK
Common questions from Hobby Room shoppers.
The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.
How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 20×20 metal building?
Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.
Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?
Yes, free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.
What’s the typical lead time for a 20×20 building?
Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.
Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?
Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month’s payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.
What’s covered under the 20-year warranty?
Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.
CUSTOMER REVIEWS
What real 20×20 Hobby Room buyers say.
⭐
No reviews yet for the 20×20 Hobby Room
Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.
A 20×20 hobby room from Steel and Stud starts at $5,900 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $123/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.
Is delivery and installation included in the 20×20 hobby room price?
Yes, every Steel and Stud hobby room ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.
Do I need a permit for a 20×20 hobby room?
Almost always for 400+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.
How is a Steel and Stud hobby room different from a wood-frame build?
Steel solves the problems wood creates, no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.
What foundation does a 20×20 hobby room need?
A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don’t already have a slab.
How fast can I get a 20×20 hobby room delivered?
Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available, call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.
Can I finance a 20×20 hobby room without a credit check?
Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month’s payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $123/month on a 20×20 hobby room.
What warranty comes with the 20×20 hobby room?
Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.
Can I customize the 20×20 hobby room in 3D before I order?
Yes, our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.
Does a 20×20 hobby room add resale value to my home?
An enclosed 20×20 hobby room typically adds $3,200–$4,800 in resale value per regional comp data, and most insurance carriers reduce premiums for indoor vehicle / equipment storage. Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust warranty transfers to the next owner.
Ready to build?
Your Hobby Room quote takes one minute.
Tell us your zip and the options you want. We’ll send back a same-day, all-in price.
400 sq ft for compact garage, RV cover, or carport
20′ x 20′14 GaugeLocal Certification Available
Pre-engineered 20×20 steel building delivers 400 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
Leg height adjustable up to 20'
$5,900.00
Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
400 sq ft for compact garage, RV cover, or carport
20′ x 20′14 GaugeLocal Certification Available
Pre-engineered 20×20 steel building delivers 400 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
Our 20×20 tool shed fits 20-foot widths and 20-foot lengths to give you a finished daily-use building without contractor pricing. Homeowners with a serious tool collection use this footprint as a dedicated tool shed.
You’re viewing:Tool Shed·Size20×20·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$5,900$6,750Save $850
or as low as $123/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You’ll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request, no surprises, no hidden fees.
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-20X20-TOOL-SHEDBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
★
4.8/5
customer rating
⏱
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We’ve provided builds for
SPATIAL LAYOUT
See how 800 sq ft fits your 20×20 tool shed.
20 feet wide × 20 feet long. Our 20×20 tool shed fits 20-foot widths and 20-foot lengths to give you a finished daily-use building without contractor pricing.
Tool Shed layout.
Our 20×20 tool shed fits 20-foot widths and 20-foot lengths to give you a finished daily-use building without contractor pricing. Homeowners with a serious tool collection use this footprint as a dedicated tool shed separate from vehicle storage. Wall-to-wall French cleat boards, a rolling tool chest, and a workbench leave a clear floor for project assembly. Lockable walk-in door keeps everything secure.
💡 Pro tip:Tool Shed works well at 20×20, add insulation + electrical for year-round use.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER
Build your 20×20 Tool Shed in 3D.
Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer, drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.
Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim, mix & match
Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
Auto-syncs to quote, what you build is what we price
All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.
🏗️
400 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 20×20 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
Tool Shed spec sheet.
Width20′
Length20′ + 6" overhang
Side height9′ standard
Floor space400 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES
How real buyers use Tool Shed.
DAILY USE
Everyday tool shed
400 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a tool shed.
STORAGE OVERFLOW
tool shed + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOM
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.
FULL PRODUCT DETAILS
20×20 Tool Shed, what makes it different.
400sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$123/mo
From RTO
🏗️
Engineered for your county
Every 20×20 tool shed is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.
Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩
Construction details
The same materials commercial fabricators use, not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.
Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚
Free delivery & install, really free
Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.
$0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
3–5 week lead time on regional routes
All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️
Warranty & lifespan
Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.
20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳
$0-down financing
Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all, fastest path to a closed deal.
RTO: $123/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders
⚡
Why 20×20?
400 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial, fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.
20′ × 20′ footprint with 400 sq ft interior
Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
Resale ROI $3,200–$4,800 added home value
PEOPLE ALSO ASK
Common questions from Tool Shed shoppers.
The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.
How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 20×20 metal building?
Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.
Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?
Yes, free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.
What’s the typical lead time for a 20×20 building?
Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.
Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?
Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month’s payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.
What’s covered under the 20-year warranty?
Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.
CUSTOMER REVIEWS
What real 20×20 Tool Shed buyers say.
⭐
No reviews yet for the 20×20 Tool Shed
Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.
A 20×20 tool shed from Steel and Stud starts at $5,900 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $123/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.
Is delivery and installation included in the 20×20 tool shed price?
Yes, every Steel and Stud tool shed ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.
Do I need a permit for a 20×20 tool shed?
Almost always for 400+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.
How is a Steel and Stud tool shed different from a wood-frame build?
Steel solves the problems wood creates, no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.
What foundation does a 20×20 tool shed need?
A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don’t already have a slab.
How fast can I get a 20×20 tool shed delivered?
Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available, call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.
Can I finance a 20×20 tool shed without a credit check?
Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month’s payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $123/month on a 20×20 tool shed.
What warranty comes with the 20×20 tool shed?
Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.
Can I customize the 20×20 tool shed in 3D before I order?
Yes, our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.
Does a 20×20 tool shed add resale value to my home?
An enclosed 20×20 tool shed typically adds $3,200–$4,800 in resale value per regional comp data, and most insurance carriers reduce premiums for indoor vehicle / equipment storage. Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust warranty transfers to the next owner.
Ready to build?
Your Tool Shed quote takes one minute.
Tell us your zip and the options you want. We’ll send back a same-day, all-in price.
400 sq ft for compact garage, RV cover, or carport
20′ x 20′14 GaugeLocal Certification Available
Pre-engineered 20×20 steel building delivers 400 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
Leg height adjustable up to 20'
$5,900.00
Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
No need to pay full price today. Choose from standard deposit, easy monthly financing, or rent-to-own with zero credit check. Every option includes free delivery & professional installation.
A prefabricated steel carport is the most cost-effective way to protect your vehicles, boats and equipment. Here is why 15,000+ property owners chose Steel and Stud.
🧮
Free Installation Included
Every tubular steel carport order includes free professional installation by a certified crew across all 48 contiguous states. No hidden assembly fees. Just confirm your site is level and we handle the rest.
🌟
20-Year Warranty on 12-Gauge
Our 12-gauge galvanized steel frames carry a 20-year limited rust-through warranty backed by the manufacturer. 14-gauge frames include a full workmanship warranty. Steel structures genuinely last decades.
💰
Factory-Direct Pricing
We work directly with multiple manufacturers, cutting out distributor markups. In most cases our prices beat the manufacturer's own direct pricing. 40-60% less than comparable wood or concrete construction.
🌞
12 Color Options Included
Choose from 12 standard powder-coat colors at no additional cost. Galvanized and primer finishes also available. Your color choice will not affect your price or lead time.
✅
Engineered for Your Climate
All structures are designed to meet local wind speed and snow load requirements. 12-gauge certified frames are available for high-wind coastal zones, heavy-snow mountain regions and tornado-prone states.
🔭
Multiple Manufacturers, One Source
We partner with multiple vetted manufacturers nationwide so you always get the closest installer, the fastest lead time, and competitive pricing for your specific location and climate zone.
Choose the Right Roof
Regular vs A-Frame vs Vertical Roof Carport
Selecting the right roof style affects weather performance, aesthetics, price and longevity. Here is how each option compares across key factors.
Regular / Horizontal
Most affordable, simple design
Lowest starting price
Fastest lead time
Moderate rain and snow shedding
Horizontal roof panels
Not ideal for heavy snow areas
Best for mild climates
Boxed Eave / A-Frame
Mid-range looks and performance
Moderate price premium (+8%)
A-frame ridge appearance
Better rain shedding than regular
Horizontal panels on A-frame
Moderate for snow areas
Great curb appeal
Vertical Roof
Best performance, highest durability
Superior snow and rain shedding
Panels run vertically top-to-bottom
No standing water or debris ponding
Ideal for heavy snow regions
Price premium (+15%)
Recommended for all climates
Verified Reviews
What Carport Owners Say
Real customers, real installs. See why 15,000+ property owners chose Steel and Stud for their metal carport.
★★★★★
4.8 out of 5 based on 2,847 verified customer reviews
★★★★★
"All my questions were answered and I believe I got the best possible deal. The installation went very smoothly and was completed in one day even though scheduled to take two. The crew of four arrived at 8AM and worked through to 10PM."
VB
Verified Buyer
Verified Customer
Steel Garage
★★★★★
"I had a tight schedule. Bill kept in touch and did everything that he promised."
RS
Ron Sigrist
Verified Customer
Metal Carport
★★★★★
"I ordered two carports for the Healthy Schools Healthy Communities grant in Cabool, MO. Bill went above and beyond — thorough on every detail, called me right back, walked me through the whole order. He even followed up on instructions for the slab pour."
HS
Grant Coordinator
Cabool, MO
Metal Carports
Common Questions
Metal Carport FAQ
Everything you need to know before ordering your steel carport: pricing, installation, permits, warranties, anchoring and dimensions.
Although this can be done with one person, we recommend having at least two people on hand to ensure safety. You can enlist the help of as many people as you like. All tubular steel orders from Steel and Stud include professional installation by a certified crew, so you do not need to self-install unless you specifically choose a DIY kit.
Carports and More Inc. has manufacturers that install in 48 contiguous states. Parts of some states are not covered by the manufacturer used for online pricing. If an order is placed and your location is not in a covered area, we will call you with the correct pricing for your area before proceeding.
Absolutely. You can install the building yourself. In most states, there is a 5% discount for self-installed buildings. The materials can be delivered to your location or picked up at the nearest factory. Contact us for current availability and self-install options in your state.
Manufacturers aim to install units within a 4-week period from the time an approved order is received. In some cases it is done sooner; however, it can take longer depending on the time of year, your location, and seasonal demand. Areas with extreme winter weather may close temporarily. Buildings over 24 feet wide require special construction and can take longer to manufacture.
Most standard carport units are constructed in just a few hours. It may take up to two days depending on the size and complexity of the building. Large triple-wide or commercial-span carports may require a second day for proper installation and inspection.
The key to a successful installation is a flat, level surface. Site preparation and building permits are the responsibility of the customer. You have approximately 2 to 3 inches of adjustment available during installation to account for minor grade differences. If your lot is significantly out of level, materials to level the site must be on hand when the crew arrives.
Re-bar and pin anchors (1/2-inch diameter, 36-inch long) are included for ground and asphalt installations. Concrete anchor bolts are used on concrete slabs at no extra charge. Mobile home auger anchors are available for ground installation at an additional cost. In several states, units enclosed on three sides require a minimum of four mobile home augers for ground installations.
Yes. You have 12 standard colors to choose from at no additional charge. Color selection does not affect your price. Galvanized and primer finishes are also available. Your color selection is made at the time of order and cannot be changed after fabrication begins.
Permit requirements vary by city, county and state. You should contact your local building department before ordering. All permit requirements such as set-backs must be resolved before ordering because once engineering plans are sent, your deposit becomes non-refundable. Generic engineered plans are available in most states. States requiring building-specific plans and calculations include CO, ID, MT, ND, NE, NJ, OR, SD, UT, WA and WY. Contact us if you have questions about your area.
The vertical roof allows water, snow and debris to run off quickly without ponding. The vertical panel orientation prevents accumulation and is especially recommended in high snow-load areas. If you are in a state with significant annual snowfall or heavy seasonal rain, the vertical roof upgrade is strongly recommended even though it carries a modest price premium.
Sizes are shown as width x length x leg height. Width is measured from outside to outside of each base rail. Length is measured by the roof metal, which includes a 6-inch overhang on each end, so the base rail is 1 foot shorter than the roof length. Height is measured by the actual leg on the outer wall. Standard-style roof units will be 1 foot taller at the sidewall than the selected leg height.
The frames are available in either 14-gauge or 12-gauge galvanized steel tubing. The roof, side and end panels are 29-gauge steel with a painted finish. Galvanized frames provide corrosion resistance. 12-gauge is 2.5mm thick; 14-gauge is 1.9mm thick. Lower gauge equals thicker, stronger steel.
14-gauge frame units carry a 30-day workmanship warranty. 12-gauge frames include both the 30-day workmanship warranty and a 20-year limited rust-through warranty on the framing, assuming normal user care and maintenance. Warranty coverage begins on the date of installation.
Yes; however, your deposit may not be fully refundable. You have 3 days from the date of order confirmation to cancel and receive a full refund. Cancellations must be in writing. After 3 days, deposits may be applied as credit toward any future purchase within 3 years. Deposits on custom-size units are non-refundable. Installation timing delays alone are not a valid reason for cancellation.
No. In most cases our prices are the same as or lower than ordering direct from the manufacturer. We work with multiple manufacturers and can often source your structure from the most competitive option for your location, size and timing, something a single manufacturer cannot do for you.
Yes. Extensions, lean-tos, sidewalls and doors can be added after installation, though there may be an additional service charge. If you plan to eventually enclose a carport with walk-in or roll-up doors, your original leg height must be 6 feet or taller to allow for standard door frames.
Slab requirements vary by manufacturer. Please contact us before pouring your concrete slab to confirm exact dimensions and anchor bolt placement for your specific carport model. Pouring the wrong size slab can delay installation.
12-foot legs are standard and available on all units. Longer legs may be available for special applications such as RV clearance or commercial-height requirements. Contact us if you need legs taller than 12 feet and we will confirm availability for your chosen structure type.
The balance due is paid directly to the manufacturer after your carport is fully installed and you are satisfied. The manufacturer accepts cash, check and credit card. They will confirm accepted payment methods when they contact you to schedule installation. PayPal is not accepted directly by the manufacturer but can be arranged through Steel and Stud with applicable processing fees. If you prefer not to pay the full balance at once, ask about our monthly financing or rent-to-own (RTO) options — both are available and let you own your carport with as little as the first month's payment down.
Yes — Steel and Stud offers three flexible payment paths: (1) Standard Payment — pay a deposit now, balance after install, zero interest; (2) Monthly Financing — competitive rates from $89/mo over 12–72 months with a soft credit pull; and (3) Rent-to-Own (RTO) — as low as $49/mo with no credit check required, first month's payment as the only down payment, and an early buyout option available at any time. RTO is available on most residential carport sizes. View all financing options →
Gauge refers to the thickness of the steel tubing: lower gauge means thicker steel. 12-gauge is 2.5mm thick and is the stronger, more durable option backed by a 20-year rust-through warranty. 14-gauge is 1.9mm thick, lighter and more affordable, carrying a 30-day workmanship warranty. For heavy snow loads, high winds or long-term investment, 12-gauge is always recommended.
Standard single-car carports (12x21, 15x21) start at $1,195 with free delivery and installation on tubular steel orders. Two-car carports (18x21, 20x21) range from $1,595 to $2,595 depending on roof style and gauge. Triple-wide carports (24x29 and larger) start around $3,895. Large commercial spans (20x38+, 24x45+) start at $5,195 and up. Contact us for a precise quote including your location, size and options.
Get Your Free Quote
Request a Free Carport Quote
Tell us about your project and a building specialist will contact you within 2 hours with a personalized, no-obligation price quote.
Why Request a Quote?
Fast ResponseAverage response time under 2 hours. Most quotes same day.
No Hidden FeesYour quote includes all standard features. Tubular orders include delivery and installation.
Low Deposit to StartDeposit varies by project scope. Balance due only after installation.
Zero ObligationGet your quote, compare options, decide when you are ready.
Metal carport dimensions follow a standard width x length x leg height format. Width runs from 10 feet to 40 feet for standard tubular steel units. Length is effectively unlimited in increments. Leg height starts at 6 feet for standard single-car carports and goes up to 12 feet as a standard option, with taller legs available on request.
Single-car carports (12 to 15 feet wide, 21 feet long) are the most affordable option starting at $1,195. Two-car carports (18 to 22 feet wide) are the most popular category, covering two standard vehicles with room to open doors. Triple-wide carports (24+ feet wide) accommodate three vehicles, trucks, boats or large equipment.
When planning your site, remember that the base rail is 1 foot shorter than the roof length due to 6-inch overhangs on each end. If you need exactly 40 feet of enclosed coverage, order a 41-foot length carport. Contact our team to confirm the right dimensions before ordering.
How Much Does a Metal Carport Cost in 2026?
Metal carport prices in 2026 range from $1,195 for a basic 12x21 single-car carport up to $9,000 or more for a large 30x50 commercial-span structure. All tubular steel carport prices from Steel and Stud include free delivery and professional installation.
Key pricing factors include: Width (wider carports cost more per linear foot), Length (additional bays add proportional cost), Leg Height (taller legs cost more), Roof Style (vertical adds ~15% over regular), and Frame Gauge (12-gauge adds ~12% over 14-gauge but adds a 20-year warranty).
DIY carport kits cost less because installation labor is excluded, but most property owners find the free professional installation included in tubular steel orders to be a significant value. A crew that installs 50 carports per week consistently outperforms a first-time DIY attempt.
Metal Carport Installation: What to Expect
After your order is confirmed and your deposit placed, the manufacturer assigns an installation crew for your region. Current lead times run 4 to 8 weeks depending on your location, structure size and seasonal demand. You will be contacted within 60 days of ordering to schedule your installation date.
Site requirements before the crew arrives: a flat, level surface (within 2-3 inches), clear access for a delivery truck, and any permit posted or available. Concrete pads are preferred but not required for ground or gravel installations. The installation crew typically completes a standard single or two-car carport in 3 to 6 hours. Larger triple-wide or tall-clearance units may require a full day.
Balance payment is made directly to the manufacturer after your carport is installed and you are satisfied with the result. Financing and rent-to-own options are available through Steel and Stud for customers who prefer monthly payments. View financing options or request your free quote to get started today.
Related Metal Building Categories
Looking for something larger or more enclosed? Explore our full range: enclosed steel garages from $3,195, metal barns for agricultural use, tall clearance RV and boat covers, barndominium shells for combined living and working space, and all commercial steel building types. Every product category includes the same factory-direct pricing and professional service.
Ready to Protect Your Vehicles with a Steel Carport?
Join 15,000+ property owners who chose Steel and Stud. Factory-direct pricing with free delivery and installation on all tubular steel orders.
1/5
2/5
3/5
4/5
5/5
})
